JP6654444B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called a pachislot provided with a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit Machines are known. The start switch detects that a start lever has been operated by a player (hereinafter, also referred to as a “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or a coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and detects the rotation of all reels. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel is pressed by a player (hereinafter, also referred to as a "stop operation") and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. I do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. The control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using a random number (hereinafter, referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed on a program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, “internal winning combination”) is performed. ) And the timing of the stop operation, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. In addition, as an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medal or the like) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as “replay”) in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. And the operation of a bonus game in which the chance of paying out game media increases. In the following, the combination (internal winning combination, display combination) related to the payout of game media (medals and the like) is referred to as “small combination”, the combination related to replay is referred to as “replay combination”, and the combination related to the operation of the bonus game. The role is called “bonus role”.

  Conventionally, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”) function has been developed ( For example, see Patent Document 1). Further, conventionally, in addition to the AT function, a function in which a game state in which a winning probability of replay is higher than usual when a specific symbol combination is displayed, that is, a function of a replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “RT”) is provided. Gaming machines equipped with them have also been developed.

  By providing the AT function as in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, it is possible for the player to expect an increase in the number of payouts due to factors other than the bonus. It can enhance interest.

JP 2011-254920 A

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, an effect is produced by an effect device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) in accordance with an internally won winning combination. There are problems such as an increase in the number of parameters to be performed, complexity of processing, and an increase in data amount.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to realize an effect determination configuration (processing content, data amount, and the like) including a pass / fail of an AT with a simple configuration. It is to provide a possible gaming machine.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

BET operation detection means for detecting the BET operation of game media (for example, the medal sensor will be described later),
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on the detection of BET operation by the BET operation detection means (e.g., the start switch 16S below),
An internal winning combination determining unit (for example, an internal lottery process described later) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting unit;
Variable display means (e.g., three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three reels described later) which are constituted by a plurality of display columns and variably display symbols required for the game based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Stepping motors 61L.61C, 61R),
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a later-described stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation by the player,
A stop control unit (for example, a reel stop control process to be described later) that stops the fluctuation display of the symbol based on a determination result of the internal winning combination determination unit and detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection unit;
A notifying unit (for example, a display device 11 and a pressing order instruction display unit to be described later) for notifying information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined for a predetermined period whether or not a transition to a notification game state (for example, a pseudo bonus state described later) in which the notification by the notification means can be executed is made, and a privilege of shifting to the notification game state is stocked. Possible notification game determining means (for example, a pseudo bonus lottery process described later),
A data transmission unit (for example, a main control circuit unit 41 to be described later) that transmits data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determination unit and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determination unit;
Effect content determining means for receiving the data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the effect content based on the received data (for example, a sub-control circuit section 42 described later),
The effect content deciding unit is configured to determine a type of the internal winning combination based on data indicating a result of the determination by the internal winning combination determining unit received from the data transmitting unit and data indicating a result of the determination by the notification game determining unit. And generating an effect parameter in combination with the presence or absence of the transition to the notification game state, based on the effect parameter, determine the content of the effect by lottery ,
The effect content determination means is configured to determine a current unit game based on a difference between a stock number of the privilege in a current unit game (for example, a value of a later-described effect reservation counter) and a stock number of the privilege in a previous unit game. Determining whether or not there is a transition to the notification gaming state in the above.

  Further, in order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

BET operation detection means for detecting the BET operation of game media (for example, the medal sensor will be described later),
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on the detection of BET operation by the BET operation detection means (e.g., the start switch 16S below),
An internal winning combination determining unit (for example, an internal lottery process described later) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting unit;
Variable display means (e.g., three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three reels described later) which are constituted by a plurality of display columns and variably display symbols required for the game based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Stepping motors 61L.61C, 61R),
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a later-described stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation by the player,
A stop control unit (for example, a reel stop control process to be described later) that stops the fluctuation display of the symbol based on a determination result of the internal winning combination determination unit and detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection unit;
A notifying unit (for example, a display device 11 and a pressing order instruction display unit to be described later) for notifying information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player;
When a specific condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of a transition to a notification game state (for example, a pseudo bonus state described later) in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1G consecutive winning / non-winning described later) Notification game determining means (for example, a later-described stock lottery process) capable of stocking a privilege of determining transition to the notification game state,
A data transmission unit (for example, a main control circuit unit 41 to be described later) that transmits data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determination unit and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determination unit;
Effect content determining means for receiving the data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the effect content based on the received data (for example, a sub-control circuit section 42 described later),
The effect content deciding unit is configured to determine a type of the internal winning combination based on data indicating a result of the determination by the internal winning combination determining unit received from the data transmitting unit and data indicating a result of the determination by the notification game determining unit. And generating an effect parameter combining the presence or absence of the transition to the notification game state, based on the effect parameter, determine the content of the effect by lottery ,
The effect content determination means is configured to determine a current unit game based on a difference between a stock number of the privilege in a current unit game (for example, a value of a later-described effect reservation counter) and a stock number of the privilege in a previous unit game. Determining whether or not a transition to the notification gaming state has been determined.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration for effect determination (processing content, data amount, and the like) including a pass / fail of an AT with a simple configuration.

It is a figure for explaining a functional flow of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the appearance structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an internal structure of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the whole circuit composition provided in the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of a sub control circuit according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition flow figure of RT game state of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition flow figure of the production game state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game operation | movement in a unit game in one Embodiment of this invention, and the transition timing of an effect game state. It is a figure showing an operation flow of a pseudo bonus start torso effect performed in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel automatic stop pattern of a pseudo bonus start torso effect performed in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel automatic stop pattern of a pseudo bonus start torso effect performed in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel automatic stop pattern of a pseudo bonus start torso effect performed in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel automatic stop pattern of a pseudo bonus start torso effect performed in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel automatic stop pattern of a pseudo bonus start torso effect performed in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing various stop positions of a reel of a pseudo bonus start round body effect performed in a gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining a generating mode of a rotation start sound at the time of a long weight effect performed in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol arrangement table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination table (the 5) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination table (the 6) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a table at the time of bonus operation in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table for RT0 game state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table for RT1 game state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the BB game state internal lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 3) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 4) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 5) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 6) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 7) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 8) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 9) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a pseudo bonus lottery table (modes 0-3: setting 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a pseudo bonus lottery table (modes 4-7: setting 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of current game pseudo RB winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel lock lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of current game pseudo RB winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of current game pseudo BB winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel lock lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of current game pseudo BB winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of next game pseudo RB winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel lock lottery table (modes 4-7: at the time of next game pseudo RB winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of next game pseudo BB winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a reel lock lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of next game pseudo BB winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a mode shift lottery table at the time of a pseudo bonus start (mode 0-3: pseudo RB, setting 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a mode change lottery table at the time of a pseudo bonus start (mode 4-7: pseudo RB, setting 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a mode shift lottery table at the time of a pseudo bonus start (mode 0-3: pseudo BB, setting 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode shift lottery table at the time of a pseudo bonus start (mode 4-7: pseudo BB, setting 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a mode change lottery table (modes 0-3) during a pseudo bonus in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a pseudo bonus mode change lottery table (modes 4-7) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a mode change lottery table at the time of a setting change in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence table of the next pseudo bonus transfer game number and random number value in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a pseudo BB stock lottery table at the time of a pseudo bonus start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a pseudo BB stock lottery table in a pseudo bonus in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a stop effect pattern lottery table at the time of a pseudo bonus start (at the time of a pseudo RB start) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a stop effect pattern lottery table at the time of a pseudo bonus start (at the time of pseudo BB start) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a stop effect pattern lottery table at the time of a pseudo bonus start (at the time of start of pseudo BB + freeze A) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a stop effect pattern lottery table (at the time of start of pseudo BB + freeze B) at the start of a pseudo bonus in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the long weight lottery table at the time of the start of a pseudo bonus in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a long weight generation game lottery table (no 1G continuation in a pseudo RB) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a long weight generation game lottery table (there is no 1G continuation in pseudo BB) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a long weight generation game lottery table (there is 1G consecutive in RB pseudo) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a long wait generation game lottery table (there is 1G run in pseudo BB) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a pseudo bonus long weight lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a display combination storage area (internal winning combination storage area, carryover combination storage area) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a game state flag storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an operation stop button storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pressing order storage area according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol code storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pressing order flag storage area according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the production game state storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an effect lottery state storage field in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the correspondence between the main winning combination name and the sub winning combination name in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a list of sub-effect flags used in effect control in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of command data transmitted from a main control circuit to a sub control circuit in the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the structure of the production instruction command data transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub control circuit in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a main flowchart (power-on processing) showing an example of processing of the main control circuit of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initialization process at power-on according to the embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process according to an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power interruption recovery process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance and start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of internal lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the lottery processing at the time of lever ON in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of normal lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of mode change lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the reel production lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel rotation start processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of reel production execution in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel lock processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel automatic stop processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the pseudo bonus display in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo bonus initialization process in one Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pull-in priority storing process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction priority table selection processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel stop control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of priority attraction control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the 3rd stop effect processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal payout processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of bonus end check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of bonus operation check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process under control of a main CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main board communication task performed by a sub CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the medal insertion command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of receiving a start command according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the constant speed start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a reel stop command reception in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payment sound command reception in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of credit information command reception in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the presentation instruction command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting process of the effect data for reel effect start in one Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a no-operation command reception process according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine showing one embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a pachislot having an AT function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, a functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislo of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for performing a game. In addition, as a game medium, for example, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can be applied in addition to medals.

  When a player inserts a medal into a pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed along an effective line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which a bonus such as payout of medals, activation of replay, activation of bonus, etc. are given to a player, and those relating to other so-called “losing”. Provided.

  When the start lever is operated, the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed. Thereafter, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the relevant reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding pieces”. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) in the specified period of 190 msec is set to four symbols.

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the combination of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means changes the combination of the symbols along the activated line as much as possible within a specified time of 190 msec (for four symbols of the symbol). Stop the rotation of the reel as displayed. In addition, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels using various specified times corresponding to the game state so that a combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the activated line. Let it.

  As described above, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination unit determines whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line is related to the winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the displayed combination of symbols is related to winning, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, the above-described series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, various kinds of display are performed by using the display of an image performed by the display device, the output of light performed by various lamps, the output of sound performed by various speakers, or a combination thereof. Production is performed.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for effect is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time by lottery from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means interlocks with the respective effects such as when the rotation of the reels is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, and when a win is determined. Execute As described above, in the pachislot, for example, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of symbols to be aimed at) is provided. Is provided to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachislot according to the present embodiment mainly includes a main control unit that performs various operations related to the progress of the game and controls the various operations, a sub-control unit that performs a game effect, and a main control unit. And a gaming machine housing for mounting the sub-control unit. The main control unit includes a main control circuit (main board) described later and various peripheral devices (various operation buttons, reel units, and the like) connected thereto. The sub-control unit includes a sub-control circuit (sub-board) described later and various peripheral devices controlled by the sub-control circuit (including various effect devices such as a display device, a speaker, a lamp group, and a reel backlight). Hereinafter, the content of each component will be described more specifically.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachislot 1.

  The pachislot 1 includes an exterior body 2 as shown in FIG. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that can be put on the hand of the carrier when carrying the pachislot 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel (display row) includes a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on a peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality (for example, 20) of symbols (identification information) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction. Although not shown, the reel body is provided with a backlight (so-called reel backlight) for irradiating light to the back surface of the sheet material. The reel backlight is turned on and off under the control of a sub-control circuit 42 described later.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a display device 11. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot 1.

  The display device 11 is attached to an upper portion of the door body 9 and includes a plurality of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged in a matrix. Then, the display device 11 performs an effect (notification) using a dot pattern represented by turning on and off a plurality of LEDs. For example, the display device 11 also performs a lighting effect of an image of a specific pattern (notification lamp described later: not shown) for notifying (notifying) a later-described pseudo bonus winning. The display device 11 is a specific example of the notification unit according to the present invention, and the display device 11 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device.

  Below the display device 11, there is provided a display window section 4 composed of three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R for displaying the symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively. Hereinafter, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are referred to as a left display window 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R, respectively.

  Each display window shows a specific example of the symbol display area according to the present invention, and is formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement areas of the three reels and are located closer to the three reels (the player side) when viewed from the front (the player side). It is provided as follows. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R via the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In this embodiment, when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window is stopped, three display windows (a predetermined number) of a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the reel are successively arranged. ) Is set to a size that can display the symbol of ()). That is, the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas are provided within the frame of each display window, and one symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the symbols on the reels can be displayed in a 3 × 3 arrangement on the display window section 4 including the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

  In the present embodiment, a pseudo line (virtual line) set from the left display window 4L to the right display window 4R in a symbol displayed in a 3 × 3 arrangement form is used to determine whether or not a winning has been achieved. It is defined as a line to be determined (hereinafter, referred to as an “effective line”). In the present embodiment, a virtual line (hereinafter, referred to as a “cross-down line”) connecting the upper region of the left display window 4L, the middle region of the middle display window 4C, and the lower region of the right display window 4R is used as an effective line. .

  In the following, a virtual line connecting the middle region of the left display window 4L, the middle region of the middle display window 4C, and the middle region of the right display window 4R is referred to as a “center line”, and the upper region of the left display window 4L, the middle display region. A virtual line connecting the upper area of the window 4C and the upper area of the right display window 4R is called a “top line” and connects the lower area of the left display window 4L, the lower area of the middle display window 4C, and the lower area of the right display window 4R. The virtual line is called a “bottom line”, and a virtual line connecting the lower region of the left display window 4L, the middle region of the middle display window 4C, and the upper region of the right display window 4R is called a “cross-up line”.

  The front panel 10 is attached to an upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is formed of a frame-like member having an opening for exposing the display device 11.

  A lamp group 21 including a plurality of LEDs and the like is provided on the upper frame, the lower frame, and both side frames of the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect contents. For example, in a part of the lower frame portion, information (for example, the number of the pressing order) indicating the pressing order of the stop button (the stopping order of the reels) during the AT operation is displayed. That is, in the lower frame portion of the front panel 10, the navigation in the pressing order is performed. The turning on / off operation of the lamp group 21 is controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  A pedestal portion 12 is provided substantially at the center of the door body 9. The pedestal section 12 is provided with various devices (medal slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1BET button 15, start lever 16, and three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) to be operated by the player.

  The medal insertion slot 13 is provided for receiving medals dropped into the pachislot 1 from outside by a player. The medals received from the medal insertion slot 13 are used for one game with a preset number (for example, three) as an upper limit. The amount exceeding the preset number can be deposited in the pachislot 1 (so-called credit function). This credit function shows one specific example of the game medium storing means according to the present invention.

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1-BET button 15 are provided for determining the number of medals stored in the pachislot 1 to be used in one game. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. The settlement button is provided for drawing out (discharging) medals stored in the pachislot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided for starting rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The pedestal section 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 composed of 7-segment LEDs. The 7-segment display 6 displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a bonus (hereinafter referred to as “payout number”) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as “credit number”). And information such as the number of inserted medals for playing a game (hereinafter referred to as “BET number”).

  Further, although not shown, the pedestal portion 12 includes a push-type flag stored in a push-order flag storage area described later, that is, a push for displaying information on the type of reel stop order to be notified at the time of AT operation. An order instruction display unit is provided. Note that the push order instruction display unit shows one specific example of the notification unit according to the present invention.

  The push order instruction display unit can be configured by a display device including, for example, a plurality of lamps and LEDs. The display mode of the information on the push order flag on the push order instruction display unit can be configured in any manner as long as the type of the push order flag can be identified. For example, the pressing order instruction display unit may be configured with a plurality of lamps, and the information about the type of the stopping order of the reels may be reported by associating the lighting / lighting pattern of the plurality of lamps with the type of the pressing order flag. Further, for example, information (for example, a stop order number or the like) directly indicating the stop order of the reels may be displayed by the push order instruction display unit.

  The display operation of the push order instruction display unit is controlled by the main control circuit 41. At the time of the AT operation, the information on the type of the stop order of the reels notified by the pressing order instruction display unit indicates the pressing order of the stop button notified by the lamp group 21 provided in the lower frame of the front panel 10. One-to-one correspondence with the information shown.

  In the present embodiment, the display area (area) of the information about the reel stop order in the pressing order instruction display unit is smaller than the area (area) in which the lamp group 21 notifies the pressing order, and the pedestal unit. The installation surface of the push order instruction display unit in 12 is not formed on the same plane as the display window unit 4 for visually recognizing the reel. Therefore, the player can play the game without consciousness (visual recognition) of the push order instruction display unit.

  Further, if the display of the information about the reel stop order by the push order instruction display unit and the notification of the press order by the lamp group 21 are executed before a notification effect of a pseudo bonus winning (lighting effect of a notification lamp) described later, the player Will recognize before winning that the pseudo bonus has been won. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the interest of the game, the timing of displaying the information about the reel stop order by the pressing order instruction display unit and the timing of notifying the pressing order by the lamp group 21 are set after the end of the notification effect of the pseudo bonus winning described later. Preferably. Furthermore, since it is generally considered that the navigation is started when the pseudo bonus is started, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (“BIG aligned” or After the “REG alignment”) is automatically stopped (pseudo stop), it is preferable that the display of information on the reel stop order by the pressing order instruction display unit and the notification of the pressing order by the lamp group 21 are executed. For example, triggered by generation processing of a later-described effect instruction command (S244, S250, and the like in FIG. 97 described later) and transmission processing, display of information on the reel stop order by the pressing order instruction display unit and pressing by the lamp group 21 are performed. The configuration may be such that the notification of the order is executed.

  A medal payout port 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L and 20R, and the like are provided below the door body 9. The medal payout exit 18 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33 (see FIGS. 3 and 4) described later to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout exit 18. Also, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the effect contents. Note that the speakers 20L and 20R are specific examples of the sound output unit, the fluctuation start effect execution unit, the payout effect execution unit, or the settlement effect execution unit according to the present invention.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachislot 1.

  The cabinet 2a is formed of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member (box-shaped member) having an open front surface. A main board 31 on which a main control circuit 41 to be described later (see FIG. 4 to be described later) is mounted is provided in an upper portion in the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit for controlling main operations of the game in the pachislo 1 and a flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of presence / absence of winning, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in a central portion in the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (to be described later, any of stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R in FIG. 4) through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Is done.

  A medal dispensing device 33 (hereinafter, referred to as a “hopper 33”) is provided in a lower portion of the cabinet 2a and is capable of storing a large amount of medals and having a structure capable of discharging them one by one. In addition, a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device included in the pachislot 1 is provided on one side (left side in the example shown in FIG. 3) of the hopper 33 in the cabinet 2a. The hopper 33 is a specific example of the game medium payout means according to the present invention.

  A sub-board 32 on which a sub-control circuit 42 to be described later (see FIGS. 4 and 5 to be described later) is provided on an upper portion of a back surface (a portion opposite to the display screen side) of the front door 2b. The sub control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls execution of effects using the display device 11, the speakers 20L and 20R, the lamp group 21, a reel backlight (not shown), and the like. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Further, a selector 35 is provided substantially at the center of the back surface of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and the shape of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 13 (see FIG. 2) are appropriate. To guide. Although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 35 </ b> S (see FIG. 4 described later) that detects that a proper medal has passed is provided on a path where the medal passes in the selector 35.

<Configuration of circuit included in pachislot>
Next, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachislo 1. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the sub control circuit.

  The pachislo 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub control circuit 42, and a peripheral device (actuator) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly constituted by a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  The main CPU 51 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 51 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches, sensors, and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R.

  The stop switch 17S is a specific example of the stop operation detecting means according to the present invention, and indicates that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation). ) Is detected. The start switch 16S is a specific example of the start operation detecting means according to the present invention, and detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 14S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player. Note that the settlement switch 14S is a specific example of the settlement operation detecting means according to the present invention.

  The medal sensor 35S is a specific example of the insertion operation detecting means according to the present invention, and detects that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 13 has passed through the selector 35. The bet switch 12S detects that a bet button (the MAX bet button 14 or the 1-BET button 15) has been pressed by the player (BET operation).

  Further, peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 50 include three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided respectively for the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle based on the number of pulse outputs. The driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to a corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a fixed angle. The three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R show one specific example of the variable display means according to the present invention.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel, and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, thereby determining the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, the number of reel symbols. Just rotated or not).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Each time a pulse counter outputs a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol, the value of a symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to “1”. Is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, the number of symbols that have been rotated since the reel index was detected is managed. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  The display drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the medal detection performed by the medal detecting unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged from the hopper 33 to the outside reaches a predetermined number of payouts. The external terminal board 18S is connected to the main control circuit 41, and the hall computer / calling device 100 is connected to the external terminal board 18S. That is, the main control circuit 41 is connected to the hall computer / calling device 100 via the external terminal board 18S.

[Sub-control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . The sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86, as shown in FIG. Further, the sub control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter 92, and an amplifier 93.

  The sub CPU 81 controls output of video, sound, and light according to a control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in response to a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub-ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a random number value for determining the effect content, and effect contents (effect data). Effect registration task for determining and registering the image, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined effect content, and a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp group 21. And a program such as a voice control task for controlling output of sound by the speakers 20L and 20R.

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, background music (BGM) and effects. Various storage areas such as a storage area for storing sound data relating to sound and a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a pattern of turning on and off light are included.

  The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  Further, peripheral devices such as the display device 11, the speakers 20L and 20R, and the lamp group 21 are connected to the sub-control circuit 42, as shown in FIG. That is, the operations of these peripheral devices are controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and the created video is displayed on the display device 11. Is done.

  In addition, the sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the D / A converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM through the speakers 20L and 20R according to sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 according to the lamp data designated by the effect contents.

<RT game state and bonus game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, various RT gaming states and bonus gaming states managed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) of the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment, and a transition flow between these gaming states will be described. I do.

  In the present embodiment, as the RT gaming state, there are provided two types of states, an RT0 gaming state and an RT1 gaming state, in which the winning probabilities of the internal winning combinations related to the replay are different from each other. Further, in the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter, referred to as “BB”) is provided as a bonus game, and the main control circuit 41 also manages a game state of the BB game (BB game state). The “BB” is a so-called “casing type continuous actuating device” related to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”), which is a so-called first class special occasion, and continuously operates “RB”.

  The RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is, for example, an RT gaming state set when the pachislot 1 is shipped or initialized. In the RT0 gaming state, the number of multiplied medals per unit game (one game) is three. That is, in the RT0 game state, a game of three cards is played.

  In this embodiment, when a BB (Big Bonus) is won (established) in the RT0 gaming state, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state as shown in FIG.

  The RT1 game state is a game state in which a game in various effect game states described later is executed, and the actual game executed by the player is performed in the RT1 game state. Note that in the RT1 game state, a game of three cards is played.

  In the RT1 gaming state, reel stop control is performed so that the BB won in the RT0 gaming state does not win. That is, in the RT1 game state, reel stop control is performed such that the symbol combination relating to BB is not stopped and displayed on the activated line. Therefore, the game in the RT1 game state is executed in the game state in which the BB has been carried over (internal winning state), and the RT1 game state is a so-called “BB flag state”.

  When the BB wins (activates) in the RT1 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the BB gaming state as shown in FIG. In the BB gaming state, a game of three is played, and when the total number of paid-out medals exceeds 90, BB ends. Then, when BB ends, the gaming state shifts from the BB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, as shown in FIG.

<Various production game states>
[Transition flow between various production game states]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, an outline of various effect game states managed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) of the pachislo 1 and a transition flow between the various effect game states will be described.

  The pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has an AT function as described above. Whether the AT function is activated is determined by lottery by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51). Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also manages the operating / non-operating state of the AT function (AT game period). That is, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) manages a game state in which the AT function is activated and a game state in which the AT function is not activated on the game presentation surface.

  In the following, the privilege of activating the AT function is referred to as a “pseudo bonus”, and a game in which the AT function is not activated is referred to as a “normal game”. A state in which the AT function operates is referred to as a “pseudo bonus state”, a state in which the AT function is inactive is referred to as a “normal gaming state”, and these states are collectively referred to as a “staging gaming state”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a pseudo bonus, a pseudo bonus (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo BB”) in which the AT function operation period (AT game period) is 70 games, and the AT function operation period is 20 games Two types of pseudo bonuses of a certain pseudo bonus (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo RB”) are provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus state (hereinafter, referred to as a “pseudo BB state”) in which a pseudo BB is performed and a pseudo bonus state (hereinafter, referred to as a “pseudo BB state”) in which a pseudo RB is performed are provided as a pseudo bonus state (notification game state). A pseudo RB state). Hereinafter, the game content performed in each of the above-described effect game states and transition between the various effect game states will be described.

  In the normal game, a pseudo bonus lottery is performed for each unit game. Then, the pseudo BB is won by the pseudo bonus lottery, and a specific symbol combination ("BIG alignment" described later) relating to the pseudo BB is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line by the pseudo bonus start torso effect described later (FIG. 7). In FIG. 7, the effect game state shifts from the normal game state to the pseudo BB state (first AT state). In this case, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, the effect game state is changed from the normal game state to a notification waiting state and a matching waiting state, which will be described later, or a pseudo bonus state via a matching waiting state. Transition (transition forms 2 and 3 in FIG. 8 described later).

  In a normal game, a pseudo RB is won by a pseudo bonus lottery, and a specific symbol combination (“REG matching” described later) related to the pseudo RB is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line by a pseudo bonus start torso effect described later. Then (in FIG. 7, described as “pseudo RB winning”), the effect game state shifts from the normal game state to the pseudo RB state (second AT state). In this case, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, the effect game state is changed from the normal game state to a notification waiting state and a matching waiting state, which will be described later, or a pseudo bonus state via a matching waiting state. The transition is made (transition modes 2 and 3 in FIG. 8 described later).

  In the pseudo BB state, an AT game in which one set is 70 games is performed. In the game period of the pseudo BB state (including the start game of the pseudo BB), stock lottery of the pseudo BB is performed for each unit game (for each game). Then, in the pseudo BB state game period, the pseudo BB game of 70 games ends without winning the stock lottery, and the pseudo bonus is not won in the unit game of the first game immediately after the end of the pseudo BB. In this case, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect game state shifts from the pseudo BB state to the normal game state.

  On the other hand, during the pseudo BB game period (including the start game of the pseudo BB), when the lottery is won and the pseudo BB is stocked, the lock period at the start of the game of the game following the end game of the pseudo BB of the current set is started. During this, a specific symbol combination ("BIG alignment" described later) relating to the pseudo BB is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line by a pseudo bonus start torso effect described later, and thereafter, the game of the pseudo BB is continued. A pseudo BB in a so-called “1G series” continuous form (hereinafter also referred to as a “rensou” form) is started. In this embodiment, a reel lock effect such as a freeze may occur before the pseudo bonus start torso effect, as described later.

  Although not shown in FIG. 7 when the pseudo BB continues in the 1G series, it is not specifically shown in the period from the third stop of the end game of the current set pseudo BB to the start of the normal rotation of the reels of the next game. The effect game state returns from the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state again via the notification waiting state and the matching waiting state described later (the pseudo bonus notification in the transition form 6 to the transition form 6 in FIG. 8 described below). Mode for shifting to a game).

  Also, in the pseudo BB game period, even if the pseudo BB game is completed without winning the stock lottery, a pseudo bonus (pseudo BB or pseudo BB) is given in the first game unit game immediately after the pseudo BB ends. When RB) is won and started, the game of the pseudo bonus (pseudo BB or pseudo RB) is continued as shown in FIG. Although not shown in FIG. 7 when the pseudo bonus is continued in such a mode, in detail, the pseudo bonus from the third stop of the end game of the current set pseudo BB to the start of the normal rotation of the reels of the next game is described in detail. In the period, the effect game state returns from the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state again via the normal game state and the later-described matching waiting state (transition from transition mode 5 to transition mode 3 in FIG. 8 described later). Aspect).

  In the pseudo RB state, an AT game in which one set includes 20 games is performed. In the game period in the pseudo RB state (including the start game of the pseudo RB), the stock lottery of the pseudo BB is performed for each unit game (each game). Then, during the pseudo RB state game period, the pseudo RB game of 20 games is completed without winning the stock lottery, and the pseudo bonus is not won in the unit game of the first game immediately after the end of the pseudo RB. In this case, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect game state shifts from the pseudo RB state to the normal game state.

  On the other hand, during the pseudo RB game period (including the start game of the pseudo RB), when the lottery is won and the pseudo BB is stocked, the lock period at the start of the game of the next game after the end game of the pseudo RB of the current set. During this, a specific symbol combination ("BIG alignment" described later) relating to the pseudo BB is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line by a pseudo bonus start turning body effect described later, and thereafter, the game of the pseudo bonus is continued (1G) A series of pseudo BBs is started). Even when the 1G-series pseudo BB is started after the end of the pseudo RB, there is a possibility that a reel lock effect such as a freeze may occur before a pseudo bonus start round body effect described later.

  Although the pseudo BB is started in 1G consecutive after the pseudo RB ends, it is not shown in FIG. 7, but in detail, after the third stop of the end game of the current set pseudo RB, the normal reels of the next game are stopped. In the period up to the start of rotation, the effect game state returns from the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state again via the notification waiting state and the matching waiting state described later (transition form 6 to transition form in FIG. 8 described later). Mode of shifting to the pseudo bonus notification game in 2).

  Also, in the pseudo RB game period, even if the pseudo RB game ends without winning the stock lottery, the pseudo BB is won and started in the first game unit game immediately after the end of the pseudo RB. When this is done, the game of the pseudo RB is continued as shown in FIG. Although not shown in FIG. 7 in the case where the pseudo bonus continues in such an aspect, in detail, from the third stop of the end game of the current set pseudo RB to the start of the normal rotation of the reel of the next game, it is not shown in FIG. In the period, the effect game state returns from the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state again via the normal game state and the later-described matching waiting state (transition from transition mode 5 to transition mode 3 in FIG. 8 described later). Aspect).

  In the present embodiment, in the unit game of the pseudo bonus, if the stock lottery of the 1G series pseudo BB is won, a notification sound (BGM) is generated to notify that the 1G series pseudo BB has been won. In the production effect of the notification sound (BGM), the BGM may be changed each time the stock of the 1G-series pseudo BB is determined in the game period of one set of the pseudo bonus.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, at the start of the pseudo bonus, it is internally determined whether or not to perform the 1G-series pseudo BB after the end of the current set pseudo bonus. Can be added. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the AT operation.

  In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the continuation of the stocked pseudo bonus is a 1G continuation only, but the present invention is not limited to this. After the pseudo bonus ends in a state in which the pseudo bonus stock is present in addition to the 1G series, for example, the game temporarily shifts to a game in a normal game state, and after the normal game for a predetermined period (predetermined number of games) is consumed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a pseudo bonus in a continuation form (so-called continuation through a precursor) in which a game of a stock pseudo bonus is executed can be stocked.

[Transition mode of production game state within unit game period]
Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a description will be given of a transition mode of the effect game state within the unit game (one game) period. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game operation in the unit game and the transition timing of the effect game state.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal game state and the pseudo bonus state (the pseudo BB state and the pseudo RB state) are provided as the effect game states managed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51). Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also manages the state of various effects performed during the transition from the normal gaming state to the pseudo bonus state.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo bonus is won, an effect (“pseudo bonus start round effect” in FIG. 8) for informing the pseudo bonus winning in the unit game at the start of the pseudo bonus is performed. Done. In this pseudo bonus start round effect, notification (lighting of the notification lamp), reel rotation start, and automatic reel stop are performed in this order. The reel operation control and the instruction to turn on the notification lamp to the sub-control circuit 42 in the pseudo-bonus start turning effect are executed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51). Note that the notification lamp shows one specific example of the notification means according to the present invention.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also manages a state in which the pseudo bonus start torso effect is performed as the effect game state. As will be described later, in the automatic reel stop effect, finally, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (“REG Alignment”, “BIG” described later) on a predetermined virtual line set on three reels. Since the symbol combination called "alignment" is automatically stopped (aligned), the state in which the pseudo bonus start torso effect is performed is hereinafter referred to as a "waiting for alignment" state.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, not only the type in which the pseudo bonus is started in the winning game but also the type in which the pseudo bonus is started from the next game of the winning game are provided as the winning type of the pseudo bonus. I have. In the latter case, the state from after the pseudo bonus is won to the occurrence of the notification effect of the next game is a state of waiting for the notification effect (lighting effect of the notification lamp). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also sets, as the effect game state, a state between the time after the pseudo bonus is won and the time when the notification effect of the next game occurs (hereinafter, referred to as “notification waiting state”). to manage.

  Hereinafter, the contents of the various transition modes (transition modes 1 to 6 in FIG. 8) of the various effect game states in the unit game will be described.

(1) Transition mode 1
A transition mode 1 in FIG. 8 is a transition mode of the effect game state when the pseudo bonus lottery is not won (loss) in the normal game.

  In the transition mode 1, first, in the normal game state, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player (the “lever” operation in FIG. 8), the normal game is started, and a pseudo bonus lottery is performed (FIG. 8). “Pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery)” operation). When the pseudo bonus lottery is not won, the effect game state does not change and the normal game state is maintained. Thereafter, the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is consumed (the “weight consumption” operation in FIG. 8).

  Next, the reel is started to rotate by a normal acceleration process ("real start" operation in FIG. 8) and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed. Thereafter, when the reels are completely stopped (the “third stop end” operation in FIG. 8), one game of the normal game in a case where the pseudo bonus lottery is not won (losing) is ended. In these series of game operations, the effect game state does not transition, and the normal game state is maintained. That is, in the normal game of the transition mode 1, in the period of one game, the effect game state does not change, and the normal game state is maintained.

(2) Transition mode 2
In the present embodiment, four types of pseudo bonus types to be won in the pseudo bonus lottery of the normal game are called “current game pseudo RB”, “current game pseudo BB”, “next game pseudo RB”, and “next game pseudo BB”. Are provided (see FIGS. 38 and 39 described later).

  The “current game pseudo RB” is a pseudo RB in which the notification of the pseudo RB and the start of the game are performed in the won unit game, and the “current game pseudo BB” is the notification of the pseudo BB and the start of the game in the won unit game. Is performed in the pseudo BB. The “next game pseudo RB” is a pseudo RB in which the notification of the pseudo RB and the start of the game are performed in the unit game next to the winning unit game, and the “next game pseudo BB” is the next unit game next to the won unit game. Is a pseudo BB in which the notification of the pseudo BB and the start of the game are performed in the unit game.

  The transition mode 2 is a transition mode of an effect game state when the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won in pseudo bonus lottery (cancellation lottery) of normal game.

  In the transition mode 2, when the player operates the start lever 16 in the normal game state, the normal game is started, and the pseudo bonus lottery is performed. Then, when the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won by the pseudo bonus lottery, the effect game state changes from the normal game state to the notification waiting state as shown in FIG. After that, the notification waiting state is maintained until the execution of various lottery processes when the lever is turned on in the game following the pseudo bonus winning game (pseudo bonus notification game). That is, various game operations after the pseudo bonus lottery in the winning game are performed in a notification waiting state. In transition mode 2, in the game following the winning game, the pseudo-BB stock lottery is performed, but the pseudo-bonus lottery is not performed.

  Next, at the time of executing various lottery processes when the lever is turned on in the next game (pseudo bonus notification game), the effect game state transitions from the notification waiting state to the matching waiting state. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is consumed, a pseudo bonus start round effect is performed. Specifically, first, a notification effect (lighting effect of a notification lamp) is performed, then rotation of the reel (forward rotation or reverse rotation) is started (not shown), and then an automatic stop effect of the reel is performed. .

  In the automatic reel stop effect, a specific symbol combination relating to the pseudo bonus (a symbol combination referred to as “REG alignment” or “BIG alignment” described later) is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line set on three reels. Upon completion of the effect, the effect game state transitions from the waiting state to the pseudo bonus state, and the pseudo bonus game is started. Then, when the pseudo bonus state is started, the reel is rotated and started by the normal acceleration processing, and is accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed. Thereafter, when the reels completely stop, the game of the first game of the pseudo bonus ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the pseudo bonus is announced in the game following the pseudo bonus winning game as in the transition mode 2, prior notification of the pseudo bonus winning may be performed before the start of the next game. For example, in the pseudo bonus winning game, an effect of turning on the notification lamp for a moment after the third stop of the reel may be performed. By providing such an advance announcement effect, the player can know the winning of the pseudo bonus before the announcement effect of the next game.

(3) Transition mode 3
The transition mode 3 is a transition mode of an effect game state when the pseudo bonus type “current game pseudo RB” or “current game pseudo BB” is won in pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery) of a normal game.

  In the transition mode 3, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player in the normal game state, the normal game is started, and the pseudo bonus lottery is performed. Then, when the pseudo bonus type “current game pseudo RB” or “current game pseudo BB” is won by the pseudo bonus lottery, the effect game state transitions from the normal game state to the waiting state as shown in FIG. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is consumed, a pseudo bonus start round effect is performed. Specifically, first, a notification effect (lighting effect of a notification lamp) is performed, then rotation of the reel (forward rotation or reverse rotation) is started (not shown), and then an automatic stop effect of the reel is performed. .

  In the automatic reel stop effect, a specific symbol combination relating to the pseudo bonus (a symbol combination referred to as “REG alignment” or “BIG alignment” described later) is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line set on three reels. Upon completion of the effect, the effect game state transitions from the waiting state to the pseudo bonus state, and the pseudo bonus game is started. Then, when the pseudo bonus state is started, the reel is rotated and started by the normal acceleration processing, and is accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed. Thereafter, when the reels completely stop, the game of the first game of the pseudo bonus ends.

(4) Transition mode 4
Transition mode 4 is a transition mode of the effect game state in the unit game during the pseudo bonus.

  In the transition mode 4, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player in the pseudo bonus state, the game of the pseudo bonus is started. In the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo lottery of the stock BB is performed for each unit game, but the pseudo bonus lottery is not performed.

  Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) has been consumed from the start of the previous game, the reels are started to rotate by normal acceleration processing and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed. Thereafter, when the reels completely stop, the unit game of the pseudo bonus ends.

  In such transition mode 4, in the period of one game, the effect gaming state does not transition, and the pseudo bonus state is maintained.

(5) Transition form 5
Transition mode 5 is a transition mode of the effect game state of the pseudo bonus end (final) game when the pseudo bonus ends and the effect game state transitions to the normal game state without winning the pseudo BB stock lottery. .

  In the transition mode 5, first, in the end game in the pseudo bonus state, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player, the pseudo bonus end game is started. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is exhausted, the reels are started to rotate by normal acceleration processing and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed.

  Next, when the reels completely stop in the end game, the game of the pseudo bonus end game ends. Then, in transition mode 5, at the end of the pseudo bonus, the effect game state transitions from the pseudo bonus state to the normal game state. Note that the transition mode after the game is ended in transition mode 5 is one of transition modes 1 to 3. Then, when the effect game state shifts from the transition mode 5 to the transition mode 3, the pseudo bonus is continuously performed.

(6) Transition mode 6
Transition mode 6 is a transition mode of an effect game state of a pseudo bonus end (final) game in a case where pseudo BB is started in 1G series after the pseudo bonus game ends.

  In transition mode 6, first, in the end game in the pseudo bonus state, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player, the pseudo bonus end game is started. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is exhausted, the reels are started to rotate by normal acceleration processing and accelerated to a predetermined rotation speed.

  Next, when the reels are completely stopped in the end game, the game of the pseudo bonus end game ends. In the transition mode 6, after the end of the current set pseudo bonus, the 1G consecutive pseudo bonus started (released). ) Is done.

  Therefore, when the reels completely stop in the end game of the pseudo bonus of the current set, the effect game state transitions from the pseudo bonus state to the notification waiting state. Note that the transition mode after the pseudo bonus end game in transition mode 6 is the transition mode of the pseudo bonus notification game in transition mode 2. Therefore, in the transition mode 6, when the pseudo bonus end game ends and the effect game state transitions to the notification waiting state, the notification waiting state executes various lottery processes when the lever of the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) is turned on. Will be maintained until time.

<Various production lottery status>
In the present embodiment, various lotteries are performed in a game in a normal game state or a game in a pseudo bonus state. For example, a pseudo bonus lottery is performed in a game in a normal gaming state, and a pseudo BB stock lottery is performed in a pseudo bonus game.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect lottery states (modes) in which the winning probability of the pseudo bonus lottery and the winning probability of the stock BB of the pseudo BB are different from each other are provided. Specifically, eight types of effect lottery states (modes) of mode 0 to mode 7 are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the pseudo bonus, during the unit bonus game during the pseudo bonus period, and at the time of changing the setting of the pachislot 1, the transition lottery of the effect lottery state (mode) is performed.

<Ceiling function>
The pachislot 1 of the present embodiment has a function (so-called ceiling function) for determining whether or not the pseudo-bonus is to be given when the number of games consumed in the normal game reaches the number of games for canceling the pseudo-bonus (so-called ceiling game number).

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of released games (“31”, “100 to 199”, and “1199”) are provided, and the number of released games of the pseudo bonus selected from among them is determined by the effect lottery state ( Mode). Therefore, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, each time the mode shift lottery is performed, the lottery process of the number of games to cancel the pseudo bonus (the next pseudo bonus described later) is performed based on the changed effect lottery state (mode). Transfer game number lottery processing) is performed.

<Pseudo bonus start round effect>
[Operation summary of pseudo bonus start round effect]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a description will be given of the content of the pseudo bonus start torso effect performed at the start of the pseudo bonus. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an operation flow of the pseudo bonus start round body effect. Note that the pseudo bonus start torso effect is performed in a state where a lock that invalidates or delays the game operation by the player has occurred.

  First, when a pseudo bonus is won by a pseudo bonus lottery when the lever is turned on, a predetermined notification wait time of the pseudo bonus is set. The notification wait time is a wait period provided to make the start timing of the automatic stop effect of the reel described later constant regardless of the symbol stop position of the reel at the end of the previous game. The notification wait time can be set arbitrarily, but in the present embodiment, it is set to 2000 msec regardless of the type of the winning pseudo bonus.

  Next, after the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has been consumed, a notification effect by turning on a notification lamp is performed. In the notification effect, for example, an image of a specific pattern is turned on by a plurality of LEDs (notification lamps: not shown) arranged in a matrix on the display device 11. The operation of the notification effect is controlled by the sub control circuit 42 based on the notification lamp lighting instruction information (information included in the start command) transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  Note that the notification effect is not limited to a simple effect of turning on a notification lamp (LED). For example, a liquid crystal display device may be used as the display device 11 to perform a notification effect using a moving image (video). In this case, it is preferable to create an effect in which the notification by the moving image (video) is completed in a period from the start of the notification effect (after the wait time has elapsed from the start of the previous game) to the start of reel rotation. Further, in the present embodiment, an example is described in which the lighting effect of the notification lamp is performed after the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has been consumed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the timing is after the completion of the wait time (4.1 sec) and within the period of the notification wait time, the lighting effect of the notification lamp can be performed at an arbitrary timing. Also, for example, if the timing is after the wait time (4.1 sec) is digested and before the symbol combination of “REG alignment” or “BIG alignment” described later is automatically stopped, the notification lamp is set at an arbitrary timing. Lighting effect can be performed.

  Next, the three reels are rotationally driven in a predetermined pattern (forward rotation, reverse rotation, etc.). Thereafter, a stop preparation operation 1 and a stop preparation operation 2 for stopping a specific symbol combination on a predetermined virtual line in an automatic reel stop effect are performed.

  In the stop preparation operation 1, during the rotation of the reels, the symbol "Red 7" of the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "Red" of the right reel 3R, which constitute a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo BB. 7 ", or the symbol" Red 7 "of the left reel 3L, the symbol" Red 7 "of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol" BAR "of the right reel 3R, which constitute a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo RB. The rotational speed of each reel is finely adjusted so that the relative positional relationship becomes a predetermined positional relationship. The method of adjusting the relative positional relationship between the symbols on each reel in the stop preparation operation 1 is not limited to this example. For example, a method of shifting the rotation start timing of each reel may be adopted.

  For example, at the start of the pseudo BB, when the reels are automatically stopped in a later-described normal stop pattern (see FIGS. 10A and 10B described later), the symbol “red 7” on the left reel 3L and the symbol “red 7” on the middle reel 3C are used. 7 and the symbol "red 7" on the right reel 3R are lined up side by side while the reels are rotating, and the rotation speed of each reel is finely adjusted. When the reels are automatically stopped according to the normal stop pattern described later at the start of the pseudo RB, the symbol "Red 7" on the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" on the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "BAR" on the right reel 3R. Are finely adjusted so that the reels are lined up horizontally while the reels are rotating.

  Next, in the stop preparation operation 2, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not the notification wait time (2000 msec) of the pseudo bonus set when the lever is turned on has elapsed. When it is determined that the notification wait time has not elapsed by this determination processing, the apparatus enters a standby state until the notification wait time is consumed.

  Then, after the notification wait time of the pseudo bonus has elapsed, and after the reel has rotated once, the automatic stop effect of the reel is started. Then, in the automatic reel stop effect, a specific symbol combination relating to the pseudo bonus (a symbol combination referred to as “REG alignment” or “BIG alignment” described later) is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line in a predetermined automatic stop pattern. Is done.

  In the automatic reel stop effect, a plurality of types of reel automatic stop patterns (stop effect patterns) are prepared, and a predetermined automatic stop pattern is determined from the plural types of automatic stop patterns by lottery. In addition, according to the type of the automatic stop pattern, the type of a specific symbol combination (a symbol combination referred to as “REG alignment” or “BIG alignment” to be described later) related to the pseudo bonus to be automatically stopped, and the specific symbol combination are set. The type of the virtual line to be stopped is also automatically determined. The details of each automatic stop pattern will be described later.

  Next, when the automatic stop effect of the reels ends, a reel lock called “pseudo bonus winning lock” occurs. In the operation period of the pseudo bonus winning lock, the sub control circuit 42 performs various effects (for example, occurrence of a fanfare) for notifying the start of the pseudo bonus. Note that the lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock can be appropriately changed according to the type of the pseudo bonus to be started. For example, the lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock at the start of the pseudo BB is set to 4000 msec, and the pseudo time of the pseudo RB is started. Can be set to 700 msec.

  Then, when the lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock elapses, the normal rotation of the reel (normal acceleration processing) is executed, and the first game of the pseudo bonus is started.

  In the present embodiment, at the start of the pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus start torso effect (reel action) is performed as described above. When the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “current game pseudo RB” or “current game pseudo BB” is won, the above-described pseudo bonus start torso effect is executed in the winning game, and the pseudo bonus is executed from the winning game. Be started. In addition, when a pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won, the above-described pseudo bonus start torso effect is executed in the next game of the winning game, and the pseudo game starts from the next game. Bonus is started.

  When the above-described pseudo bonus start round body effect is provided, in the start game of the pseudo bonus, during the lock period, a specific symbol combination relating to the pseudo bonus is automatically referred to as “REG alignment” or “BIG alignment” to be described later. Symbol combination) stops on a predetermined virtual line, and a pseudo bonus game is started. Therefore, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus game (special game) can be started regardless of the skill of the player.

  Normally, a specific symbol combination (a symbol combination referred to as “REG matching” or “BIG matching” to be described later) relating to the pseudo bonus is performed through the rotation start operation of the reel after the start operation of the start game in the pseudo bonus state is detected. The time required to stop on the predetermined virtual line is not constant because it depends on the position of the symbol stopped and displayed before the start game of the pseudo bonus. That is, the period in which the notification effect can be performed by the notification lamp (the time for the notification effect) depends on the position of the symbol stopped and displayed before the start game of the pseudo bonus. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the period from the detection of the start operation to the start of the operation of automatically stopping the specific symbol combination on the predetermined virtual line is set to the predetermined notification weight time (2000 msec). The notification effect by the notification lamp can be executed within this notification wait time period. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to secure the time for the notification effect independent of the position of the symbol stopped and displayed before the start game of the pseudo bonus.

  Further, in the above-described pseudo bonus start torso effect, when a wait time (4.1 sec) has elapsed from the start of the previous game, a notification of a pseudo bonus win is made, and thereafter, the reel rotation operation is started. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the pattern of the reel rotation operation at the start of the pseudo bonus (reverse rotation or the like) is increased, after the reel rotation is started, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus is finally obtained (" It becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the symbol combination called “REG matching” or “BIG matching” automatically stops (stops during locking) by the effect. In addition, as in the normal game (when the pseudo bonus start torso effect (lock) does not occur), the rotation of the reels is started after the elapse of the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game. It can be prevented that the presence or absence of the bonus start round effect (lock) is immediately determined. From these facts, in the present embodiment, the notification effect of the pseudo bonus winning can be made a more effective effect.

[Various automatic stop patterns of reels]
In the present embodiment, as a reel automatic stop pattern (stop effect pattern) in the pseudo bonus start turn drum effect, “normal stop pattern”, “all turn simultaneous stop pattern”, “high speed stop pattern”, “long stop pattern” , "Re-stop pattern" and "sway stop pattern" are provided. Hereinafter, the outline of the operation of each automatic stop pattern will be described with reference to the drawings (note that the symbol arrangement in each drawing is shown in FIG. 17 described later).

(1) Normal stop pattern In the normal stop pattern, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped in the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped in the second lap. Then, the right reel 3R is automatically stopped in the third lap, or the right reel 3R is automatically stopped in the first lap, the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped in the second lap, and the left reel 3L is automatically stopped in the third lap. Stop pattern. This normal stop pattern may be executed in both the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo BB and the pseudo bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo RB.

  In the normal stop pattern at the start of the pseudo BB, a specific symbol combination "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (hereinafter, referred to as "BIG alignment") relating to the pseudo BB is set on three reels. The display is stopped on a predetermined virtual line (one of a center line, a top line, a bottom line, a cross down line, and a cross up line). In the normal stop pattern at the start of the pseudo RB, a specific symbol combination “red 7”-“red 7”-“BAR” (hereinafter, referred to as “REG matching”) relating to the pseudo RB is a predetermined virtual line (center). Line, top line, bottom line, cross down line or cross up line).

  10A and 10B show an example of a stop operation of the normal stop pattern. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a stop operation of a normal stop pattern performed in the pseudo bonus start round body effect at the start of the pseudo RB, and the stop of the normal stop pattern for automatically stopping “REG alignment” on the center line. It is a figure showing an operation. On the other hand, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the stop operation of the normal stop pattern performed in the pseudo bonus start round body effect at the start of the pseudo BB, and the stop of the normal stop pattern for automatically stopping “BIG alignment” on the center line. It is a figure showing an operation.

  In the normal stop pattern shown in FIG. 10A, first, after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed), the left reel 3L is stopped in the first stop automatic stop operation. At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the left reel 3L. Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second lap. At this time, stop control of the middle reel 3C is performed so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. Then, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation in the third lap. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol “BAR” stops in the middle area of the right reel 3R.

  In the normal stop pattern shown in FIG. 10B, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first turn after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed). At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the left reel 3L. Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second lap. At this time, stop control of the middle reel 3C is performed so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. Then, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation in the third lap. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the right reel 3R.

(2) Simultaneous stop pattern for all cylinders Although not shown, the simultaneous stop pattern for all cylinders automatically stops all three reels simultaneously in the first lap after the end of stop preparation operation 2 (after the notification wait time of the pseudo bonus). Stop pattern. When the execution of the all-body simultaneous stop pattern is determined, after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed, and after the predetermined all-body simultaneous stop wait time provided separately is consumed, the reels are stopped. Automatic stop operation is started.

  There is a possibility that the all-round-body simultaneous stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start round body effect at the start of the pseudo BB. In addition, in the all-body simultaneous stop pattern, “BIG alignment” is automatically stopped on the center line.

(3) High-speed stop pattern In the high-speed stop pattern, three reels are arranged in a predetermined order (the left reel 3L and the middle reel in the present embodiment) in the first lap after completion of the stop preparation operation 2 (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed). 3C and the right reel 3R in this order). In addition, the high-speed stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start round effect at the start of the pseudo BB.

  FIG. 11 shows a stop operation example of the high-speed stop pattern. In the high-speed pattern shown in FIG. 11, first, at the stage of the stop preparation operations 1 and 2, the symbol "Red 7" stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L, and the symbol "Red 7" stops in the upper region of the middle reel 3C. Then, a state in which the right reel 3R is rotating is generated.

  Next, when the notification wait time of the pseudo bonus has elapsed, when the symbol "red 7" reaches the position one upper side of the upper region of the right reel 3R on the rotating right reel 3R (hereinafter, this state is referred to as " The automatic stop effect of the three reels is started, and the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are rotated and started again. That is, at the timing when the “BIG alignment” is aligned on the line (preparation line) connecting the symbol region on the upper side of the middle region of the left reel 3L, the upper region of the middle reel 3C and the upper region of the right reel 3R. Automatic stop production of the three reels is started. Then, in the first lap after the start of the automatic stop production of the three reels, the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are stopped in this order. At this time, the three reels are controlled to stop so that “BIG alignment” is stopped on the center line.

  More specifically, in this high-speed stop pattern, after the shift state is generated, the left reel 3L is rotated and moved in the forward direction by 20 frames and stopped, and the middle reel 3C is rotated and moved in the forward direction by 21 frames. Then, the right reel 3R is rotated by 22 frames in the forward direction and stopped. That is, in the high-speed stop pattern, “BIG alignment” is stopped on the center line after the deviation state is generated and before the reel makes two rotations. In this stop pattern, the symbol combination can be changed to “BIG alignment” (7 red alignments) in the shortest time from the state of misalignment (preparation state).

  By providing the automatic stop effect of the reel of the high-speed stop pattern as one of the reel effects, it is possible to provide a variety of interesting reel actions to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interest of the player in the reel action (reel effect) can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are stopped and the right reel 3R is rotating when generating the state of the shift, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the center reel 3C and the right reel 3R may be stopped, and the left reel 3L may be rotating, and a state of a shift may be generated. Alternatively, the right reel 3R and the left reel 3L may be stopped, and the middle reel 3C is rotating. As a result, the state of the misalignment may be generated.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the automatic stop effect of the high-speed stop pattern can be generated only at the start of the pseudo BB has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that an effect can be generated.

  In this case, the flow from the stop preparation operations 1 and 2 to the automatic reel stop operation is as follows. First, a state is generated in which the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L, the symbol "red 7" stops in the upper region of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is rotating. Next, after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed, in the rotating right reel 3R, the symbol “BAR” has arrived at a position one upper side of the upper region of the right reel 3R (a state of misalignment is generated). At the timing, the automatic stop effect of the three reels is started, and the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are rotated and started again. Thereafter, in the same manner as the stop operation described with reference to FIG. 11, the first reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped in this order in the first lap after the automatic stop effect of the three reels is started, and the center reel is stopped. "REG matching" is stopped.

(4) Long stop pattern In the long stop pattern, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped in the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped in the second lap. Thereafter, the right reel 3R is automatically stopped in the fourth lap instead of the third lap. Note that the long stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start round effect at the start of the pseudo BB. In the long stop pattern, “BIG alignment” is automatically stopped on the center line.

  FIG. 12 shows a stop operation example of the long stop pattern. In the long stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 ends (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed). At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the left reel 3L. Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second lap. At this time, stop control of the middle reel 3C is performed so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. In the third lap, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation in the fourth lap without stopping the right reel 3R. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the right reel 3R.

(5) Re-stop Pattern In the re-stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped in the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is stopped in the second lap. The right reel 3R is automatically stopped at the third lap and automatically stopped. At this point, the three reels are controlled to stop so that “REG alignment” is stopped on the center line. Next, the left reel 3L or the right reel 3R is moved again to stop “BIG alignment” on a predetermined virtual line. That is, in the re-stop pattern, the pseudo bonus to be started is once shown to be a pseudo RB, and then the pseudo bonus to be started is reported to be a pseudo BB.

  The re-stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start round effect at the start of the pseudo BB. In the re-stop pattern, if the left reel 3L is finally moved again, “BIG alignment” is stopped on the cross-down line, and if the right reel 3R is finally moved again, “BIG alignment” is displayed. "BIG alignment" is stopped on the center line.

  FIG. 13 shows an example of the stop operation of the restart pattern. In the re-stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first turn after the end of the stop preparation operation 2 (after the notification wait time of the pseudo bonus has elapsed). At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the left reel 3L. Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second lap. At this time, stop control of the middle reel 3C is performed so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. Next, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation in the third lap. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol “BAR” stops in the middle area of the right reel 3R. Therefore, at this point, "REG alignment" is stopped on the center line.

  Thereafter, when the right reel 3R is rotated by one frame in the opposite direction (the direction from the bottom to the top in FIG. 13) and stopped, as shown in A after the stop in FIG. Stopped on. Further, after the “REG alignment” is once stopped on the center line, the left reel 3L is rotated and moved by one frame in the reverse direction (the direction from the bottom to the top in FIG. 13), and then stopped. As shown in B after the stop, “BIG alignment” is stopped on the cross-down line.

  In the stop operation example of the re-stop pattern shown in FIG. 13, an example in which the right reel 3R or the left reel 3L is finally rotated and moved by one frame in the reverse direction and stopped is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, after the "REG alignment" is temporarily stopped on the center line, the right reel 3R is rotated and moved by 19 frames in the forward direction (the direction from top to bottom in FIG. 13) to change the "BIG alignment" to the center line. It may be stopped on top. Further, for example, after the “REG alignment” is temporarily stopped on the center line, the left reel 3L may be rotated and moved by 19 frames in the forward direction to stop the “BIG alignment” on the cross-down line.

(6) Shaking stop pattern In the shaking stop pattern, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped in the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the notification wait time of the pseudo bonus has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped in the second lap. Then, in the third lap, the right reel 3R is automatically stopped. However, in the swing stop pattern, the reels are alternately rotated in a small range in the forward and reverse directions around the stop position without completely stopping each reel. That is, in the swing stop pattern, each reel is stopped in a state of swinging (vibrating) around the stop position along the rotation direction of the reel.

  Note that the swing stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start round effect at the start of the pseudo BB. In the swing stop pattern, “BIG alignment” is automatically stopped on the center line.

  FIG. 14 shows an example of the stop operation of the swing stop pattern. In the swing stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed). At this time, the left reel 3L is controlled to stop so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L, and the left reel 3L is slightly moved along the rotation direction of the reel around the stop position. It is controlled to swing in a range (alternately rotating and moving forward and backward).

  Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the second lap. At this time, the stop of the middle reel 3C is controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle reel 3C is slightly moved along the rotation direction of the reel around the stop position. It is controlled to swing in the range.

  Then, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation in the third lap. At this time, the right reel 3R is controlled to stop so that the symbol “red 7” stops in the middle area of the right reel 3R, and the right reel 3R is slightly moved along the rotation direction of the reel around the stop position. It is controlled to swing in the range.

[Various stop positions of the reel]
In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of stop positions (stop lines) of “BIG alignment” or “REG alignment”, which are finally stopped and displayed by the automatic stop effect of the reels, are provided. FIG. 15 shows various stop positions (stop lines) of “BIG alignment” and “REG alignment”.

  In the present embodiment, the stop positions (stop lines) of “REG alignment” are on the cross-down line (stop position 1 in FIG. 15 (cross-down REG alignment)) and on the center line (stop position 2 ( On the cross-up line (stop position 3 in FIG. 15 (cross-up REG alignment)), on the top line (stop position 4 in FIG. 15 (upper REG alignment)), and on the bottom line ( Five types of stop positions, that is, a stop position 5 (lower REG alignment) in FIG. 15, are provided. In the present embodiment, the stop position (stop line) of “BIG alignment” is on the cross-down line (stop position 6 in FIG. 15 (cross-down BIG alignment)) and on the center line (stop position in FIG. 15). 7 (middle BIG alignment), on the cross-up line (stop position 8 in FIG. 15 (cross-up BIG alignment)), on top line (stop position 9 in FIG. 15 (upper BIG alignment)), and bottom line Five types of stop positions are provided at the top (stop position 10 in FIG. 15 (lower BIG alignment)).

  Since the type of the stop position (stop line) of “BIG aligned” or “REG aligned” is determined according to the automatic stop pattern of the reel (stop effect pattern), the automatic stop pattern of the reel (stop effect pattern) ) Is determined, the type of the stop position (stop line) of “BIG alignment” or “REG alignment” is also uniquely determined.

  In the present embodiment, the automatic stop effect at the stop position 9 (upper BIG alignment) is an effect lottery state (mode 6 or mode 7) in which the pseudo BB is easily won, and the number of times of the extended stay This is an effect that suggests that the mode can be expected (for example, the mode itself has a high loop rate). In the present embodiment, the automatic stop effect at the stop position 9 (upper BIG alignment) may be selected only when the effect lottery state is Mode 6 or Mode 7 (see FIG. 60 described later).

<Various reel locks executed during the pseudo bonus game period>
[Various reel lock at start of pseudo bonus]
The pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has a function of generating a reel lock at the start of a pseudo bonus (or at the time of winning). That is, the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has a function of generating a reel lock as a pseudo bonus start or a winning notification effect.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of reel locks are provided as the reel locks to be generated at this time. Specifically, a reel lock with a short lock time called “short lock” and a reel lock with a long lock time called “freeze” are provided. The freeze is provided with two types of reel locks, “freeze A” and “freeze B”.

  In this embodiment, the lock time of the short lock (specific lock) is 1000 msec, the lock time of the freeze A is 30,000 msec, and the lock time of the freeze B is 2,000 msec. Further, when the freeze B is executed, the game is set to be able to be played after a lapse of 30,000 msec from the start of the lock of the freeze B.

  The presence / absence of these reel locks and the type of the reel locks to be generated are determined by reel lock random determination performed in a pseudo bonus winning game. At this time, as the types of reel locks to be won, the reel locks of the short lock, the freeze A and the freeze B may each be independently won, or both the short lock and the freeze A or the short lock and the freeze B may be won. Both may be won.

  Then, when the execution of the predetermined reel lock is determined by the reel lock lottery, the reel is executed after the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is consumed in the pseudo bonus winning game or the start game. Lock is performed. That is, the reel lock is executed before the above-described pseudo bonus start torso effect (before the notification of the pseudo bonus).

  The above-described various reel locks are configured to be generated mainly when a pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won (see FIG. 40 described later). To FIG. 47). Then, when the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won and the short lock is won as the reel lock, in the game in which the pseudo bonus is won from the start of the previous game, Short lock occurs after the wait time is exhausted. In this case, an effect is performed in which the game start (reel rotation start) is slightly delayed.

  On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won, and a freeze A or a freeze B is won as the reel lock, the next game of the game in which the pseudo bonus is won ( In the pseudo bonus notification game), after the wait time from the start of the previous game (winning game) is consumed, a freeze A or a freeze B occurs, and thereafter, the above-described pseudo bonus start round effect is executed.

  Furthermore, when the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB" is won, and when the short lock and the freeze A or the freeze B are reeled as the reel lock, the pseudo bonus is won. In the game, after the wait time from the start of the previous game is exhausted, a short lock occurs, and in the next game after the game in which the pseudo bonus was won, the wait time from the start of the previous game (winning game) was exhausted. Thereafter, a freeze A or a freeze B occurs, and thereafter, the above-described pseudo bonus start round effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the occurrence of a short lock is managed by a flag called a “short lock flag”, and the presence or absence of a freeze A is managed by a flag called a “freeze A flag”. The presence / absence is managed by a flag called “freeze B flag”. In the following, the flags for managing the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reel lock are collectively referred to as “production reservation flags”. These effect reservation flags are stored in the main RAM 53.

[Long weight production function]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the start game of the pseudo bonus, the 1G-series pseudo BB stock lottery is performed. In the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment, when the stock lottery is won, a pseudo bonus of a predetermined number of games to be executed after the current game (70 games for the pseudo BB, 20 games for the pseudo RB). In a specific unit game within the period, a function to execute a rock effect (hereinafter, referred to as “long weight effect”) that slightly extends the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is provided.

  More specifically, in the long weight effect, when a 1G-series pseudo BB stock lottery is won in a pseudo bonus start game, a lever game is performed after a lever is turned on in a pseudo game unit game of a specific number of games after the second game. After the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start is consumed, a short lock is generated for a predetermined lock time (1000 msec in the present embodiment). The presence or absence of the long weight effect and the game to be generated are determined by lottery.

  As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, in the start game of the pseudo bonus, it is internally determined whether or not to perform the 1G-series pseudo BB after the end of the current set pseudo bonus game period. Further, in the present embodiment, when 1G pseudo BB is won in the pseudo bonus start game, a long weight effect for expecting 1G pseudo BB winning in the middle of the current set pseudo bonus game period is performed. Is Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interest in the AT operation of the player can be maintained, and the interest of the player in the game during the pseudo bonus game period can be increased.

  Also, in the present embodiment, during the pseudo bonus game period, 1G consecutive pseudo BB stock lottery is performed for each unit game. The pachislot 1 of the present embodiment also has a function capable of generating a long weight effect (the occurrence of a short lock) in the corresponding lottery game when the stock lottery is won. Note that whether or not a long-weight effect is generated when a stock lottery during the pseudo bonus is won is determined by lottery.

  In addition, when the occurrence timing of the long weight effect triggered by the stock lottery win during the pseudo bonus overlaps with the occurrence timing of the long weight effect set by the stock lottery win in the above-described pseudo bonus start game One long weight effect (short lock) is executed without generating a long weight effect (short lock) twice.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not a long weight effect has occurred is managed by a short lock flag that manages whether or not a short lock determined by the reel lock lottery described above has occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect reservation flag for managing whether or not a long weight effect has occurred is provided separately from an effect reservation flag for managing whether or not a short lock determined by reel lock lottery has occurred. You may.

[Generation mode of rotation start sound when short lock occurs]
As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in a game during a pseudo bonus, a short lock (long weight effect) may occur as a reel effect at the start of the game. Further, when the start lever 16 is operated to start the reel rotation operation, the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment emits predetermined sounds (hereinafter referred to as “rotation start sounds”) at the start of the reel rotation by the speakers 20L and 20R. It has an effect (specific effect) function to generate from. The operation of generating the reel start sound is controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, if the generation mode of the rotation start sound when the short lock occurs is different from that when the short lock does not occur (for example, at the start of the normal game or at the start of the reel effect in which the short lock does not occur). Let

  FIGS. 16A and 16B are diagrams showing the generation mode (generation timing) of the reel rotation start sound at the start of the game. FIG. 16A is a diagram illustrating a generation mode (generation timing) of a reel rotation start sound when a short lock is not generated, and FIG. 16B is a diagram illustrating a generation mode of a reel rotation start sound when a short lock is generated. .

  First, the manner in which the rotation start sound of the reel is generated when the short lock does not occur will be described. When the short lock does not occur, the main control circuit 41 transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub control circuit 42 at a specific timing after the start lever 16 is operated, and executes a reel rotation start operation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16A, the sub-control circuit 42 generates a rotation start sound upon receiving a reel rotation start command. Therefore, when the short lock does not occur, a rotation start sound is generated at the start of the rotation operation of the reel.

  Next, the manner in which the reel rotation start sound is generated when a short lock occurs will be described. When a short lock occurs (when a long weight effect occurs), first, the main control circuit 41 starts the short lock (long weight effect) at a specific timing after the start lever 16 is operated, and the sub control circuit 42. A later-described effect instruction command (see FIG. 80 described later) is transmitted. Then, when the period of occurrence of the short lock elapses, the main control circuit 41 executes a reel rotation start operation.

  The effect instruction command is a command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 at each trigger of various effect operations during a reel effect, and information corresponding to the trigger is set and transmitted as the effect instruction command. Therefore, for example, at the start of the short lock (long weight effect), an effect instruction command in which information indicating the start of the reel effect (long weight effect) is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. Further, the transmission timing of the effect instruction command transmitted at the start of the short lock (long weight effect) (or the reception timing on the sub side) is substantially the same as that of the reel rotation start command when the short lock does not occur. That is, the generation timing of the rotation start sound when the short lock (long weight effect) is generated is substantially the same as the generation timing of the rotation start sound when the short lock is not generated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the sub-control circuit 42 generates a rotation start sound upon receiving the effect instruction command at the start of the short lock (long weight effect).

  That is, in this embodiment, when a short lock occurs, a rotation start sound is generated at the start of the short lock, and then, after a short lock generation period has elapsed, the rotation operation of the reels is started. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the short lock occurs, the rotation start operation of the reel is delayed by the short lock period from the generation of the rotation start sound.

  By providing such a rotation start sound effect function, when a short lock occurs, the rotation start sound generation operation at the start of the effect is the same as that during normal operation, but the reel rotation start operation generates the rotation start sound. Will be late. Therefore, a contradiction can be generated between the effect operation by the rotation start sound and the actual operation of the reel, and an effective effect can be given to the player.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, as an effect for generating a deviation from the rotation start operation of the reel when a short lock occurs, the effect of generating a rotation start sound has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the effect performs a specific effect operation triggered by the start of rotation of the reel, the effect technology at the time of occurrence of the short lock described above can be applied to any effect. For example, when a predetermined effect is performed by the display device 11, the lamp group 21, the movable role, or the like when the rotation of the reels is started, the short lock operation is performed in the same manner as the operation of generating the rotation start sound described above. At the time of occurrence, control may be performed so that the effects and the rotation start operation of the reel are shifted from each other.

[Reel lock function at the end of pseudo bonus]
The pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has a function of generating a reel lock (hereinafter, referred to as a “pseudo bonus END lock”) after the third stop of the reel in a game in which one set of pseudo bonuses is ended. The pseudo bonus END lock is a lock that always occurs at the end of the pseudo bonus, and is used not only when the normal game is started after the end of the set of pseudo bonuses, but also in the first game after the end of the set of pseudo bonuses. This is also performed when a pseudo bonus is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, in the third post-stop production process performed after the display combination is determined (after the display command generation and storage process is completed) and before the medal payout process and the bonus operation check process, A bonus END lock is performed (see FIGS. 81 and 105 described later). That is, in the present embodiment, when the display combination is the small combination, the pseudo bonus END lock is performed before the medal payout processing, and when the display combination is the replay combination, the pseudo bonus END lock is performed before the medal automatic insertion processing. A pseudo bonus END lock is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display combination is a small combination, the pseudo bonus END lock is performed after the payout process of the medal, and when the display combination is the replay combination, the medal is automatically inserted. After the processing, the pseudo bonus END lock may be performed.

  The lock time of the pseudo bonus END lock changes according to the type of the pseudo bonus to be ended. In the present embodiment, the lock time of the pseudo bonus END lock at the end of the pseudo BB is set to 5200 msec, and the lock time of the pseudo bonus END lock at the end of the pseudo RB is set to 2500 msec.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Symbol arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table includes data (hereinafter, a symbol code (see FIG. 17) that specifies the position of each symbol in the rotational direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position. ) Is defined.)

  In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel in the frame of the display window of each reel is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, the order corresponding to the value of the symbol counter in the order of progressing in the reel rotation direction (the direction from the symbol position “19” to the symbol position “0” in FIG. 17) based on the symbol position “0”. “0” to “19” are assigned to each symbol as a symbol position.

  That is, by referring to the symbol counter value ("0" to "19") and the symbol arrangement table, the reels are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of the display window frame of each reel. It is possible to specify the type of symbol that is present. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “7”, the symbol position “8” is set in the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L within the frame of the left display window 4L. , A symbol "Replay 2" at symbol position "7" and a symbol "BAR" at symbol position "6" are displayed.

[Symbol combination table]
Next, the symbol combination tables (Nos. 1 to 6) will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table includes a symbol combination (combination and combination name) predetermined according to the type of the privilege (bonus, small role, replay), the corresponding display combination code content (storage area, data) and the number of payouts. And the corresponding relationship.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the activated line (cross-down line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, a prize is won. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that a winning is achieved, a privilege such as a medal payout, a replay (re-game) operation, and a bonus operation is given to the player. If the symbol combination displayed along the activated line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, the result is a so-called "losing". That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, so that the symbol combination of “losing” is defined. The present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol combination may be provided directly in the symbol combination table to directly specify the symbol combination of “loss”.

  The various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the activated line. "Data" in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  Further, the data of the “storage area” in the display combination code column is data for designating a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73 described later) in which the data of the corresponding symbol combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 33 symbol code storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations according to differences in “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table indicates the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In a symbol combination in which one or more numerical values are given as data of the "number of payouts", payout of the same number of medals as the numerical value is performed. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination according to the combination name “C — 7 A” (CD bell) is determined for the insertion number of three medals (the symbol combination “B -"Bell"-"Bell" is stopped and displayed on the activated line), seven medals are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination according to the combination name “C_Rip A1_1” (middle replay) is determined (the symbol combination “Bell”-“Replay 1”-“Bell according to“ C_Rip A1_1 ”) Is displayed on the activated line), the replay is activated. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination associated with the combination name “C_BB” (the symbol combination “Replay 3”-“watermelon 1”-“red 7” associated with “C_BB” is stopped and displayed on the activated line) ) Is determined, BB (big bonus) is activated.

[Table for bonus activation]
Next, the bonus activation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table includes a gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 70 described later) provided in the main RAM 53, a bonus end number counter, a playable number counter, and a winning number counter when the bonus game is performed. Specify the data to be stored.

  The gaming state flag is data for identifying the type of the operating gaming state (RT gaming state and bonus gaming state). Therefore, in the present embodiment, respective game state flags indicating the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the BB game state are provided (see FIG. 70 described later).

  The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the total number of medals paid out in the bonus game has exceeded a prescribed number (payout number) which is a trigger for ending the bonus game. In the present embodiment, the operation of the BB started upon the stop display of the symbol combination related to the bonus combination having the name “C_BB” ends when the payout of medals exceeding the specified number “90” is performed.

  That is, at the start of the bonus operation, the value specified by the bonus operation table is stored in the bonus end number counter, and thereafter, every time a medal is paid out through the operation of the bonus, the value of the bonus end number counter is changed. Is subtracted. Then, the operation of the bonus ends on condition that the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to less than “0”.

  The playable number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of the RB, that is, the so-called playable number. The prize possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games in which a combination of symbols related to a prize can be displayed in one RB game, that is, a so-called prize possible number.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, an internal lottery table is provided separately in each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (BB flag state), and the BB gaming state.

  Each internal lottery table includes a winning number (internal winning combination), a lottery value when each winning number is determined, and a data pointer (small win / replay data pointer) acquired when each winning number is determined. And a bonus data pointer). In the internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, for convenience of description, the name of the internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number and the name of the effect lottery flag are also described.

  In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of internal winning such as a preset bonus or small combination. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random number value) extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) is set to a lottery value defined corresponding to each winning number. Subtract sequentially. Next, a determination (internal lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, if the result of the subtraction is negative ("digit" occurs) in the predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number (internal winning combination) has been won.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the probability that the assigned data pointer is determined increases as the winning number with the larger numerical value defined as the lottery value. The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 performs various lottery processes related to the pseudo bonus (AT). Various lottery tables used for the lottery process (for example, a pseudo bonus lottery table, a reel lock lottery table, and a mode after the mode) In the lottery table), a lottery value is specified for each effect lottery flag described in the internal lottery tables of FIGS. 25 to 27, not for each internal winning combination. Therefore, when performing lottery processing with reference to these lottery tables, the lottery processing is performed based on the effect lottery flag corresponding to the internal winning combination. In the following, the effect lottery flag with the name “fixed combination” and the effect lottery flag with the name “fixed cherry” are also collectively referred to as “fixed”.

  In addition, various effect lottery flags are stored in the main RAM 53. Then, when a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery, only the rendering lottery flag corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination is set to the ON state (data “1” is stored), and other effects are stored. The lottery flag is set to the off state (data “0” is stored). For example, when the name “F_123B1” is internally won, only the effect lottery flag with the name “normal combination” is turned on.

(1) Internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state (general gaming state). The RT0 gaming state internal lottery table is referenced when the internal winning combination lottery process is executed for each unit game in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state).

  The RT0 gaming state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “24” (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values, and the data pointers that can be obtained.

  For example, in the internal winning combination lottery process with reference to the setting 1 of the RT0 gaming state internal lottery table, the probability that the winning number “2” (the internal winning combination related to the name “F_BB”) is won is 4000/65536. Then, in this case, “0” is acquired as the small pointer / replay data pointer, and “1” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

  Also, for example, in the internal winning combination lottery process with reference to the setting 1 of the RT0 gaming state internal lottery table, the probability that the winning number “3” (the internal winning combination related to the name “F_Replay”) is won is 8978/65536. Becomes Then, in this case, “1” is obtained as the small part / replay data pointer, and “0” is obtained as the bonus data pointer.

  In the following, the internal winning combinations corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, “Fixed Combination”, “Fixed Cherry” and “Medium Che (Middle Cherry)” are collectively referred to as “Rare Combination”. "

(2) Internal Lottery Table for RT1 Game State (State Between BB Flags) FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RT1 game state (state between BB flags). The internal lottery table for the RT1 game state is referred to when the internal winning combination lottery process is executed for each unit game in the RT1 game state (game state between BB flags).

  The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “24” (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values, and the data pointers that can be obtained.

  For example, in the internal winning combination lottery process with reference to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state, the probability that the winning number “2” (internal winning combination with the name “F_BB”) is won is 0. Since the RT1 game state is a state between the BB flags, the BB combination is not won in the RT1 game state.

  Further, for example, in the internal winning combination lottery process with reference to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state, the probability that the winning number “3” (internal winning combination related to the name “F_Replay”) is won is 12778/65536. Becomes That is, the winning probability of the replay combination in the RT1 game state (game state between BB flags) is higher than that in the RT0 game state (general game state). Then, in this case, “1” is obtained as the small part / replay data pointer, and “0” is obtained as the bonus data pointer.

(3) BB gaming state internal lottery table FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BB gaming state internal lottery table. The internal lottery table for the BB gaming state is referred to when the internal winning combination lottery process is executed for each unit game in the BB gaming state.

  The internal lottery table for the BB gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “3” (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values, and the data pointers that can be obtained.

  In the BB gaming state, as shown in FIG. 27, one of the internal winning combinations of the name “losing”, the names “F_RB combination 1” and “F_RB combination 2” is won. The internal winning combination (small win / replay data "23") associated with the name "F_RB combination 1" corresponds to all small wins, and the internal winning combination (small win / replay use) associated with the name "F_RB combination 2". The data “24”) corresponds to the combination names “C_1 sheet 40”, “C_1 sheet 1” to “C_1 sheet 47_2”, and “C_control 1_1” to “C_control 3”. That is, in the BB gaming state, the replay combination is not won.

[Symbol combination determination table]
Next, the symbol combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination determination table defines the correspondence between a data pointer associated with each internal winning combination and a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on an active line (cross-down line). In other words, when the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer (internal winning combination) are determined, the type of the symbol combination that can be displayed on the activated line, that is, the type of the display combination that can be awarded, is uniquely determined. It is determined.

  The various data described in the symbol combination (display combination) column in each symbol combination determination table is a symbol combination permitted to be displayed along the activated line set over the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. This is data for identification. "Data" in the symbol combination (display combination) column is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as "data" in the display combination column in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. A unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit of. Further, a circle in the data pointer column in the symbol combination determination table indicates a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on the activated line in the acquired data pointer (internal winning combination), that is, a display combination that enables winning. Is shown.

  In each of the symbol combination determination tables shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, a symbol combination (display combination) related to the operation of the bonus is defined for the bonus data pointer "1", and the small combination / replay data pointer "1" is defined. A symbol combination (display combination) relating to the small combination and the replay combination is defined for each of the characters "-" and "24". That is, the symbol combination determination table stores the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the display combination related to the operation of the bonus, and the display combination related to the small combination / replay data pointer and the payout of the medal or the display combination related to the operation of the replay. And the corresponding relationship.

  For example, when “1” (internal winning combination with the name “F_BB”) is acquired as the bonus data pointer, only the symbol combination associated with the combination name “C_BB” is stopped as shown in FIGS. It can be displayed. Further, for example, when “1” (internal winning combination of the name “F_Replay”) is acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, the combination name “C_REP A1_1” ”To“ C_lip E6_3 ”can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when “14” (internal winning combination with the name “F_Common B1”) is acquired as the small pointer / replay data pointer, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, the combination name “C_7 The symbol combinations related to "A" to "C_7 sheet E2_2", "C_control 2", and "C_control 3" can be stopped and displayed.

  Note that the symbol combination determination table does not specify a case where the “internal winning combination” is “losing”, but this does not apply to all the symbols defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. Indicates that the display of the combination is not permitted.

[Symbol winning prize operation flag data table]
Next, the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the data of the internal winning combination that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the activated line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table, the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time can be determined. The symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23).

  For example, when the symbol "red 7" is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, in the storage areas 1 to 33 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (red 7) in the reel type "left". “1” is stored in a bit corresponding to a displayable internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table is ANDed with data stored in a symbol code storage area described later (see FIG. 73 described later) and stored.

[Pseudo bonus lottery table]
Next, various pseudo bonus lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. The pseudo bonus lottery table is referred to when a pseudo bonus lottery process (see FIG. 88 described later) is executed in a unit game in a normal game state.

  In this embodiment, in each setting (settings 1 to 6), a pseudo bonus lottery table is provided for each effect lottery state (mode). The pseudo bonus lottery tables shown in FIGS. 38A to 38D are pseudo bonus lottery tables referred to when the effect lottery state is Mode 0 to Mode 3, respectively. The pseudo bonus lottery tables shown in FIGS. 39A to 39D are pseudo bonus lottery tables referred to when the effect lottery state is from mode 4 to mode 7, respectively. In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, a separate pseudo bonus lottery table is provided for each setting, but here, for simplicity of description, the pseudo bonus lottery table referred to when the setting is set to 1 is set. Only shown.

  The pseudo-bonus lottery table defines the correspondence between various types of pseudo-bonus lottery opportunities, winning / non-winning lottery values of pseudo bonuses set for each lottery trigger, and pseudo-bonus types at the time of winning. In the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table of the present embodiment, winning / non-winning of the AT (pseudo BB, pseudo RB) and the start timing of the AT (the game or the next game) are determined simultaneously. I have. In the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table of this embodiment, the AT (pseudo BB, pseudo RB) win / non-win, the AT type (pseudo BB or pseudo RB), and the AT start timing ( (The game or the next game) at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery opportunity of the pseudo bonus is when the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names “normal combination”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “fixed” and “medium cho” is internally won. Or, when the number of digested games in the normal game reaches the number of games released from the pseudo bonus (when the game reaches the ceiling). In addition, the winning types of the pseudo bonus are four types of “current game pseudo RB”, “current game pseudo BB”, “next game pseudo RB”, and “next game pseudo BB”.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flag of the name “normal combination”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “fixed” or “middle cho” is internally won, the pseudo bonus lottery processing is performed in the pseudo bonus lottery process. The lottery value in the corresponding effect lottery flag column in the table is referred to. Further, when the number of digested games in the normal game reaches the number of games released from the pseudo bonus, in the pseudo bonus lottery process, the lottery value in the “ceiling” column of the lottery opportunity in the pseudo bonus lottery table is referred to.

  For example, if the setting of pachislot 1 is setting 1, the effect lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery opportunity is “normal combination”, a pseudo bonus lottery table is used as shown in FIG. 38A. In the pseudo bonus lottery, the pseudo bonus type “current game pseudo RB” is won with a probability of 189/65536, and the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” is won with a probability of 4/65536. Further, for example, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is setting 1, the effect lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery opportunity is “watermelon”, 1230 in the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table. The pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” is won with a probability of / 65536, and the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo BB” is won with a probability of 410/65536.

  For example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is setting 1, the effect lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery opportunity is “cherry”, the pseudo bonus lottery table is used as shown in FIG. 38A. In the pseudo bonus lottery, the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” is won with a probability of 656/65536. Also, for example, the setting of pachislot 1 is setting 1, the effect lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery trigger is “confirmed” (the effect lottery flag is “confirmed combination” or “confirmed cherry”) or “medium”. In the case of “Cho”, the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo BB” is always won in the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table. Further, for example, if the setting of the pachislot 1 is set to 1, the effect lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery opportunity is “ceiling”, in the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table, , The pseudo bonus type “current game pseudo RB” is won.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is the setting 1 and the lottery trigger is “fixed” (fixed combination or fixed cherry) or “medium cho” , Regardless of the type of the effect lottery state (mode), the game is always won in the “next game pseudo BB”. When the setting of the pachislot 1 is the setting 1 and the lottery opportunity is “ceiling”, the “current game pseudo RB” is always won in the modes 0 to 3, and in the modes 4 to 7, One of the "current game pseudo RB" and the "current game pseudo BB" always wins.

  In the present embodiment, the information on the start trigger (release trigger) of the pseudo bonus is managed using a flag referred to as an “effect win trigger flag”. The effect win trigger flag is determined for each type of the pseudo bonus lottery trigger. Is provided. Specifically, the effect winning trigger flags include a “normal combination release flag”, a “watermelon release flag”, a “cherry release flag”, a “commitment release flag”, a “middle tier cherry release flag”, and a “game number release flag”. Various flags are provided.

  The normal combination cancellation flag is an effect winning combination flag set to an ON state when a lottery opportunity is “normal combination” and a pseudo bonus is won, and the watermelon cancellation flag is a lottery opportunity “watermelon”. This is an effect winning trigger flag that is set to the ON state when a false bonus is won. The cherry release flag is a production winning trigger flag that is set to an on state when the lottery trigger is “Cherry” and a pseudo bonus is won, and the finalization release flag is that the lottery trigger is “determined (determined combination or (Determined cherry) "and an effect winning trigger flag set to the ON state when the pseudo bonus is won. In addition, the middle-stage cherry release flag is an effect winning trigger flag that is set to an on state when the lottery opportunity is “medium cho” and the pseudo bonus is won, and the number-of-games release flag is This is an effect winning trigger flag that is set to “ON” when a pseudo bonus is won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo bonus type “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB” is won, the pseudo bonus is started in the next game of the winning game. (Freeze A or Freeze B) may occur. In the present embodiment, information on the trigger (release trigger) of the pseudo bonus accompanied by the long freeze is managed by an effect winning trigger flag called “long freeze release flag”.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, during the pseudo bonus game period, if the pseudo lottery of the pseudo BB is won, the pseudo BB is started in 1G series after the end of the current set pseudo bonus. Therefore, in the present embodiment, information on the start timing (release trigger) of the pseudo bonus due to the release of the stored pseudo BB is also managed by the effect winning trigger flag called “pseudo BB stock release flag”. The various effect winning trigger flags described above are stored in the main RAM 53.

[Reel lock lottery table]
Next, various reel lock lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The reel lock lottery table is referred to in a reel lock lottery process (see FIG. 88 described later) performed when a pseudo bonus lottery is won in a unit game in a normal game state.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a reel lock lottery table is provided for each combination of the type of the pseudo bonus that has been won and the mode (effect rendering state). The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40A to 40D and FIGS. 41A to 41D are tables that are referred to when the bonus type “current game pseudo RB” is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40A to 40D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is Mode 0 to Mode 3, respectively. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. Each of these tables is referred to when the effect lottery state is a mode 4 to a mode 7.

  The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 42A to 42D and FIGS. 43A to 43D are tables referred to when the bonus type “current game pseudo BB” is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 42A to 42D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is Mode 0 to Mode 3, respectively. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. Each of these tables is referred to when the effect lottery state is a mode 4 to a mode 7.

  The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44A to 44D and FIGS. 45A to 45D are tables referred to when the bonus type “next game pseudo RB” is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44A to 44D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is Mode 0 to Mode 3, respectively. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. Each of these tables is referred to when the effect lottery state is a mode 4 to a mode 7.

  The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D and FIGS. 47A to 47D are tables referred to when the bonus type “next game pseudo BB” is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is Mode 0 to Mode 3, respectively. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. Each of these tables is referred to when the effect lottery state is a mode 4 to a mode 7.

  The reel lock lottery table includes various lottery triggers of the reel lock effect performed at the start of the pseudo bonus, a winning / non-winning lottery value of the reel lock effect set for each lottery trigger, and a reel lock type at the time of the win. And the corresponding relationship.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery trigger of the reel lock effect is that the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flag of the name “normal combination”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “fixed” and “medium cho” is internally won. Or when the number of digested games in the normal game reaches the number of games released from the pseudo bonus (when the game reaches the ceiling). The winning types of the reel lock type are “short lock” (lock time 1000 msec), “freeze A” (lock time 30000 msec), “breeze B” (lock time 2000 msec), “short lock + freeze A”, and “short lock”. Lock + Freeze B ".

  Note that when the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flag of the name “normal combination”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “fixed” or “medium cho” is internally won, the reel lock lottery processing is performed in the reel lock lottery process. The lottery value in the corresponding effect lottery flag column in the table is referred to. Further, when the number of games consumed in the normal game reaches the number of games released from the pseudo bonus, in the reel lock lottery process, the lottery value in the “ceiling” column of the lottery trigger in the reel lock lottery table is referred to.

  In the reel lock lottery process using the reel lock lottery table, as shown in FIGS. 40 to 47, the reel lock is mainly performed when the bonus winning type is “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB”. The effect is configured to win. For example, when the bonus winning type is “next game pseudo BB”, the effect lottery state is mode 1, and the lottery opportunity is “medium cho”, as shown in FIG. 46B, 64/256 With a probability of “short lock”, one of “freeze A”, “freeze B”, “short lock + freeze A” and “short lock + freeze B” is won with a probability of 32/256.

  In the present embodiment, the probability that the reel lock effect will be won when the “current game pseudo RB” is won is 0, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, and the reel lock effect is generated when the “current game pseudo BB” is won. The winning probability also becomes a very small value (almost no winning) as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43.

[Mode shift lottery table at start of pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48 to FIG. 51, various types of pseudo bonus start mode shift lottery tables will be described. The pseudo bonus start mode shift lottery table is referred to in a mode shift lottery process (see FIG. 89 described later) performed when the pseudo bonus lottery is won in the unit game in the normal gaming state.

  In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table is provided for each combination of the type, the mode (the effect lottery state), and the setting of the pseudo bonus that has been won. Various pseudo bonus start mode shift lottery tables shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 are tables that are referred to when the setting is setting 1. In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table is separately provided for each setting, but here, for simplicity of description, the case where the setting is the setting 1 is referred to. Only the pseudo bonus start mode shift lottery table is shown.

  The pseudo bonus start mode shift lottery tables shown in FIGS. 48A to 48D and FIGS. 49A to 49D are tables referred to in the mode shift lottery processing performed at the start of the pseudo RB. The pseudo bonus start mode shift lottery tables shown in FIGS. 48A to 48D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is Mode 0 to Mode 3, respectively. The pseudo bonus shown in FIGS. 49A to 49D are respectively provided. The start mode shift lottery table is a table that is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7, respectively.

  The pseudo bonus start mode shift lottery tables shown in FIGS. 50A to 50D and FIGS. 51A to 51D are tables referred to in the mode shift lottery process performed at the start of the pseudo BB. The pseudo bonus start mode shift lottery tables shown in FIGS. 50A to 50D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is Mode 0 to Mode 3, respectively. The pseudo bonus shown in FIGS. 51A to 51D are respectively provided. The start mode shift lottery table is a table that is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7, respectively.

  The mode shift lottery table at the time of the pseudo bonus start includes various kinds of lottery triggers of the mode shift lottery process performed at the start of the pseudo bonus and each effect lottery state (mode 0 to mode 7) of the shift destination set for each lottery trigger. The correspondence with the lottery value is defined.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery trigger of the mode transition lottery is that the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flag of the name “normal combination”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “fixed” and “medium cho” is internally won. This is the time when the number of games consumed in the normal game reaches the number of games released from the pseudo bonus (when reaching the ceiling), or when the freeze is won by reel lock random determination.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flag of the name “normal combination”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “fixed” or “medium cho” is internally won, in the mode shift lottery process, a pseudo bonus is started. The lottery value in the corresponding effect lottery flag field in the hour mode shift lottery table is referred to. When the number of games consumed in the normal game reaches the number of games released from the pseudo bonus, in the mode transition lottery process, the lottery value in the “ceiling” column of the lottery opportunity in the mode transition lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus is referred to. Further, when a freeze is won in the reel lock lottery, the lottery value in the “FLZ” field of the lottery trigger in the mode shift lottery table at the time of the pseudo bonus start is referred to in the mode shift lottery process.

  In the mode shift lottery process using the mode shift lottery table at the time of starting the pseudo bonus, for example, at the time of starting the pseudo BB, the setting is set to 1, the effect lottery state is set to mode 4, and the lottery trigger is “Cherry”. In the case of, as shown in FIG. 51A, mode 0 is determined as the transitional effect lottery state with a probability of 195/256, and mode 1 is determined as the transitional effect lottery state with a probability of 26/256. , With the probability of 1/256, the mode 2 is determined as the effect lottery state of the transition destination. That is, in these cases, the effect lottery state is demoted.

  In the mode shift lottery process using the mode shift lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus, for example, at the start of the pseudo BB, the setting is set to 1, the effect lottery state is mode 4, and the lottery trigger is “ In the case of “cherry”, as shown in FIG. 51A, mode 5 is determined as the transitional effect lottery state with a probability of 32/256, and mode 6 is determined as the transitional effect lottery state with a probability of 2/256. It is determined. That is, in these cases, the effect lottery state is promoted.

[Pseudo bonus medium mode shift lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, various pseudo bonus medium mode lottery tables will be described. The pseudo bonus mode transition lottery table is referred to in a mode transition lottery process (see FIGS. 90 and 91 to be described later) performed when a pseudo BB stock lottery is won in a unit game during the pseudo bonus game period. Is done.

  In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus medium mode shift lottery table is provided for each effect lottery state (mode). The pseudo lottery mode transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52A to 52D are tables which are referred to when the effect lottery state is Mode 0 to Mode 3, respectively, and are in the pseudo bonus mode transition shown in FIGS. 53A to 53D. Each of the lottery tables is a table that is referred to when the effect lottery state is from mode 4 to mode 7. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a common pseudo bonus mode transition lottery table is used regardless of the type of the pseudo bonus. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo bonus is separately set for each type of the pseudo bonus. A medium mode shift lottery table may be provided.

  The mode transition lottery table during the pseudo-bonus is a lottery table of various lottery triggers of the mode transition lottery process during the game period of the pseudo bonus and each effect lottery state (modes 0 to 7) of the transition destination set for each lottery trigger. Specify the correspondence with the value. In the present embodiment, the lottery opportunity of the pseudo bonus medium mode transition lottery is determined by the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names “normal role”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “fixed” and “medium cho”. It is the time when the internal prize is won.

  In the pseudo bonus mode transition lottery table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the lottery value is appropriately set so that the effect lottery state (mode) is not demoted by the mode transition lottery process during the pseudo bonus game period. Is set.

  For example, when the current effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 4, the lottery value is appropriately set for each type of lottery trigger so that the shift to the mode 5 or more effect lottery state is determined. . Further, when the current effect lottery state is mode 5, the lottery value is appropriately set for each type of lottery trigger so that the shift to the mode 5 or more effect lottery state is determined. When the effect lottery state is mode 6, the lottery value is appropriately set for each type of lottery trigger so that the transition to the effect lottery state of mode 6 or higher is determined. Further, when the current effect lottery state is mode 7, the lottery value is appropriately set so that mode 7 is maintained as the effect lottery state regardless of the type of the lottery trigger.

[Mode change lottery table when setting is changed]
Next, the setting change mode shift lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The setting change mode shift lottery table is referred to in the effect lottery mode lottery process (see FIG. 83 described later) performed when the setting of the pachislot 1 is changed (when an operation to a setting change switch (not shown) is detected). You.

  The mode change lottery table at the time of setting change is a lottery value of each setting after change (one of settings 1 to 6) and each effect lottery state (mode 0 to mode 7) of the transition destination specified for each setting. And the corresponding relationship.

  In the setting change mode lottery table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, one or more lottery values are defined for modes 0 to 3, and when the setting is changed, the effect lottery state is set to mode 0 to mode 3. 3 is determined. Specifically, in the present embodiment, mode 0 is determined as an effect random determination state with a probability of 128/256, and mode 1 is determined as an effect random determination state with a probability of 39/256, regardless of the setting type after the change. Mode 2 is determined as an effect random determination state with a probability of 3/256, and mode 3 is determined as an effect random determination state with a probability of 86/256.

[Next Pseudo Bonus Shift Game Number Lottery Table]
Next, the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table is referred to in the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery process (see FIG. 83, FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 described later) for determining the number of games to cancel the pseudo bonus (the number of ceiling games of the normal game). Is done.

  The next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table includes each effect lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7) and various next pseudo bonus shift game numbers (number of pseudo bonus release games) defined for each effect lottery state. Is defined corresponding to the lottery value. Note that the number of next pseudo bonus shift games specified in the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table of the present embodiment is three types of “31”, “100 to 199”, and “1199”.

  In the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery using the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table, if the effect lottery state is any of modes 0 to 2, as shown in FIG. If “1199” is determined as the (number of pseudo bonus cancellation games) and the effect lottery state is mode 3, “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus shift game number, and the effect lottery state is mode 4. In the case where the number is one of the following, "31" is determined as the next pseudo bonus shift game number. That is, in the present embodiment, the greater the value of the mode, the smaller the number of next pseudo bonus shift games (the number of ceiling games), and the higher the probability of winning the pseudo bonus.

  In the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery using the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table, if “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus shift game number, the next pseudo bonus shift game number described later will be described. The next pseudo bonus shift game number (pseudo bonus release game number) is determined with reference to a correspondence table between the pseudo bonus and the random number.

[Correspondence table between the number of next pseudo bonus shift games and random numbers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a description will be given of a correspondence table between the number of next pseudo bonus shift games and random numbers.

  The correspondence table between the number of next pseudo bonus shift games and the random number value is "100 to 199" as the number of next pseudo bonus shift games in the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery process (see FIGS. 83, 89, and 91 described later). Is determined when the number of pseudo bonus shift games (the number of pseudo bonus release games) is determined based on the obtained random number value. In this case, as the random number value to be used, the random number value used in the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery may be used, or a new random number value (0 to 255) may be acquired.

  The correspondence table between the number of next pseudo bonus shift games and the random number value defines the relationship between each random value from 0 to 255 and the next pseudo bonus shift game number (100 to 199) associated with each random value. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the next pseudo bonus shift game numbers 199 to 100 are respectively associated with random number values 0 to 99, and the next pseudo bonus shift game numbers 199 are respectively associated with random number values 100 to 199. ~ 100 are associated. In the present embodiment, the next pseudo bonus shift game numbers 199 to 144 are associated with the random numbers 200 to 255, respectively.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect lottery state is Mode 3 (when the next pseudo bonus shift game number is determined to be “100 to 199”), the next pseudo bonus shift game number is 144 to 199. The probability of being determined increases. Note that the correspondence between the number of next pseudo bonus shift games and the random value is not limited to this example, and can be set arbitrarily.

[Pseudo BB stock lottery table at start of pseudo bonus]
Next, a pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of various pseudo bonuses will be described with reference to FIGS. 57A and 57B. The pseudo-BB stock lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus is referred to in the pseudo-BB (1G-series) stock lottery process (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in the pseudo bonus start game. FIG. 57A is a pseudo-bonus-start pseudo-BB stock lottery table referred to at the start of the pseudo-RB, and FIG. 57B is a pseudo-bonus-start pseudo-BB stock lottery table referenced at the start of the pseudo-BB.

  The pseudo-BB stock lottery table at the time of starting the pseudo-bonus indicates the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB (1G consecutive) and the lottery value set for each lottery result in the effect lottery state (mode). ) Is specified for each type.

  At the start of the pseudo RB, as shown in FIG. 57A, only when the effect lottery state is any of modes 5 to 7, the stock of the pseudo BB (1G consecutive) is won with a probability of 5/256. Further, at the start of the pseudo BB, as shown in FIG. 57B, only when the effect lottery state is any of modes 5 to 7, the stock of the pseudo BB (1G consecutive) is won with a probability of 32/256. That is, in the present embodiment, when the effect lottery state is any of the modes 0 to 4, the configuration is such that the pseudo lottery (1G consecutive) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo bonus is not won.

[Pseudo BB stock lottery table during pseudo bonus]
Next, a pseudo BB stock lottery table during pseudo bonus will be described with reference to FIG. The pseudo BB stock lottery table during the pseudo bonus is referred to in a pseudo BB (1G consecutive) stock lottery process (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in a unit game (including a pseudo bonus start game) during the pseudo bonus game period. Is done.

  The pseudo BB stock lottery table during the pseudo bonus defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB (1G series) and the lottery value set for each lottery result for each lottery opportunity. . In the present embodiment, the lottery trigger of the stock lottery process during the pseudo bonus is an internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names “Normal role”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry”, “Fixed” and “Medium”. Is the time when the internal winning is achieved.

  In the present embodiment, for example, in the stock lottery process during the pseudo bonus game period, if the lottery opportunity is “normal combination”, as shown in FIG. 58, the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G consecutive) is won. do not do. Further, for example, in the stock lottery process during the pseudo bonus game period, if the lottery opportunity is “watermelon”, the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G consecutive) is won with a probability of 5/256, and the lottery opportunity Is "Cherry", the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is won with a probability of 1/256. Further, for example, in the stock lottery process during the pseudo bonus game period, if the lottery opportunity is “confirmed” or “medium cho”, the pseudo lottery (1G consecutive) stock lottery is always won.

[Stop effect pattern lottery table at start of pseudo bonus]
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIGS. The pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table is a reel effect lottery process (automatic stop pattern of a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus) for determining a reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect. This is referred to in FIG.

  59 is a pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table referred to when the pseudo RB starts and no freeze occurs at the start of the pseudo RB, and FIG. This is a pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table referred to when there is no freeze at the start of the pseudo BB. FIG. 61 is a pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table which is referred to when the pseudo BB starts and a reel lock effect of “Freeze A” occurs at the start of the pseudo BB. Is a pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table which is referred to when a pseudo BB starts and a reel lock effect of "freeze B" occurs at the start of the pseudo BB.

  The pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table shows the correspondence between the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect and the lottery value set for each stop effect pattern for each effect lottery state (mode). Defined in

  As shown in FIG. 59 to FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, 28 types of stop effect patterns (pattern Nos. 0 to 27) are provided as reel stop effect patterns in the pseudo-bonus start round effect at the start of the pseudo bonus. .

  Pattern No. The stop effect patterns 0 to 19 correspond to the above-described normal stop patterns. For example, the pattern No. The reel automatic stop operation of the stop effect pattern of 0 “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 2 (middle REG aligned)” is as follows. First, after the reel operation control of the reel stop preparation operation 2 is completed, the reel is normally rotated. Thereafter, the left reel 3L is stopped in the first lap, the middle reel 3C is stopped in the second lap, and the right reel is stopped in the third lap. At this time, the symbol "Red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "BAR" is stopped in the middle region of the right reel 3R. I do. That is, a specific symbol combination ("red 7"-"red 7"-"BAR": REG matching) related to the start of the pseudo RB is stopped and displayed on the center line. That is, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of 0 corresponds to the normal stop pattern described in FIG. 10A.

  Also, for example, the pattern No. The reel automatic stop operation of the stop effect pattern 5 “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 7 (middle BIG alignment)” is as follows. First, after the reel operation control of the reel stop preparation operation 2 is completed, the reel is normally rotated. Thereafter, the left reel 3L is stopped in the first lap, the middle reel 3C is stopped in the second lap, and the right reel is stopped in the third lap. At this time, the symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the left reel 3L, the symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the right reel 3R. Stop. That is, a specific symbol combination ("red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7": BIG alignment) related to the start of the pseudo BB is stopped and displayed on the center line. That is, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of No. 5 corresponds to the normal stop pattern described in FIG. 10B.

  Pattern No. The 20 stop effect patterns “normal rotation → third barrel long → stop position 7 (middle stage BIG aligned)” correspond to the long stop pattern described in FIG. Also, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern 21 “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 2 (middle REG aligned) → restart left → stop position 6 (cross down BIG aligned)” is the re-stop pattern (after stop B) described in FIG. Corresponding to Further, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern 22 “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 2 (middle stage REG aligned) → restart right → stop position 7 (middle stage BIG aligned)” corresponds to the re-stop pattern (after stop A) described in FIG. Corresponding.

  Pattern No. The 23 stop effect patterns “normal rotation → shift stop → stop position 7 (middle stage BIG aligned)” correspond to the high-speed stop pattern described with reference to FIG. Also, the pattern No. The 24 stop effect patterns “sway stop” correspond to the shake stop pattern described in FIG. Further, the pattern No. The 25 stop effect patterns “all stop” correspond to an all-round simultaneous stop pattern (not shown) in which all reels stop simultaneously after the reel operation control of the reel stop preparation operation 2 ends.

  Pattern No. The 26 stop effect patterns “Long freeze A → normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 7 (middle BIG aligned)” are executed when “freeze A” or “short lock + freeze A” is won by reel lock lottery. This is a reel stop pattern. In this stop effect pattern, the above-mentioned pattern No. A freeze of 30,000 msec occurs before the stop effect pattern of No. 5. Also, the pattern No. The 27 stop effect patterns “long freeze B → normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 7 (middle BIG aligned)” are executed when “freeze B” or “short lock + freeze B” is won by reel lock random determination. This is a reel stop pattern. In this stop effect pattern, the above-mentioned pattern No. A freeze of 2000 msec occurs before the stop effect pattern of No. 5.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, when the pseudo bonus is started and no freeze occurs at the start of the pseudo bonus, the various stop effect patterns become larger as the mode value increases. May be chosen. For example, in the reel effect lottery process at the start of the pseudo BB and when no freeze occurs at the start of the pseudo BB, as shown in FIG. 60, the pattern No. has a probability of 216/256. The stop effect pattern of No. 5 is won, and the pattern No. 5 has a probability of 6/256. 6 stop effect patterns are won. In the reel effect lottery process in this case, the pattern No. is determined with a probability of 2/256. One of the stop effect patterns 7 to 9, 17 to 19, 23 and 24 is won, and the pattern No. is generated with a probability of 5/256. One of the stop effect patterns 15, 16, and 25 is won. Further, in the reel effect lottery process in this case, the pattern No. is determined with a probability of 1/256. Any one of the stop effect patterns 20 to 22 is won.

[Long wait lottery table at start of pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63A to 63D, a description will be given of the long weight lottery table at the start of various pseudo bonuses. The long wait lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus is referred to in a long weight lottery process (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in the unit game at the start of the pseudo bonus.

  FIG. 63A is a pseudo bonus start long weight lottery table referred to when the pseudo BB (1G consecutive) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo RB is non-winning, and FIG. 63B is a pseudo weight at the start of the pseudo BB. This is a pseudo bonus start long weight lottery table referred to when the BB (1G consecutive) stock lottery is not won. FIG. 63C is a pseudo bonus start long weight lottery table which is referred to when the pseudo BB (1G consecutive) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo RB is won. FIG. 63D is a pseudo weight BB at the start of the pseudo BB. It is a pseudo bonus start long weight lottery table that is referred to when the pseudo lottery (1G consecutive) stock lottery is won.

  The long wait lottery table at the time of starting the pseudo bonus defines a correspondence relationship between a winning / non-winning (lottery result) of a long weight effect (short lock occurrence) and a lottery value set for each lottery result.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63A to 63D, when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G consecutive) at the start of the pseudo bonus is not won, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is not won. The configuration is as follows. On the other hand, if the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G consecutive) at the start of the pseudo bonus is a winning, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is won with a probability of 26/256.

[Long wait occurrence game lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67, various types of long-weight generating game lottery tables will be described.

  The long weight generation game lottery table is referred to in a long weight lottery process (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in the unit game at the start of the pseudo bonus. FIG. 64 is a long weight generation game lottery table which is referred to when the pseudo lottery (1G consecutive) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo RB is not won. FIGS. 65A and 65B show the pseudo weight BB at the start of the pseudo BB. It is a long weight generation game lottery table that is referred to when the pseudo lottery (1G consecutive) stock lottery is not won. FIG. 66 is a long weight generation game lottery table referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo RB has been won. FIGS. 67A and 67B show the start of the pseudo BB. 21 is a long weight generation game random determination table referred to when the pseudo random BB (1G consecutive) stock random determination is a win.

  The long weight generation game lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between a game in which a long weight effect (short lock) can be generated and a lottery value set for each game. In the pseudo RB long wait generation game lottery table, the first to twentieth games are defined as games in which a long wait effect (short lock) can be generated, and a long wait generation game lottery for pseudo BB is specified. At the table, the first to 70th games are defined as games in which a long weight effect (short rock) can be generated.

  In the present embodiment, if the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G ream) at the start of the pseudo bonus is non-winning, as described above, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is non-winning. In the lottery process using the long weight generation game lottery table shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 referred to in the case, “No occurrence” is always won. On the other hand, if the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G ream) at the start of the pseudo bonus is a winning, a long weight effect (short lock occurrence) occurs, so that FIG. 66 and FIG. In the lottery process using the long weight generation game lottery table, a lottery result other than “no occurrence” is always won.

  For example, if the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G ream) at the start of the pseudo RB is a winning, as shown in FIG. 66, the second to fourth games are generated with a probability of 10/256 as a long weight effect. And any one of the 17th to 20th games is selected, and any one of the fifth, sixth, and sixteenth games is selected as a long weight effect generation game with a probability of 11/256, and with a probability of 17/256. Any one of the seventh to fifteenth games is selected as the game in which the long weight effect is generated. For example, when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the time of the start of the pseudo BB is a win, as shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B, the game is generated with a long weight effect with a probability of 2/256. Any one of the 2nd to 10th games and the 61st to 70th games is selected, and any of the 11th to 26th games and the 45th to 60th games is generated as a long weight effect generation game with a probability of 4/256. Any one of the 27th to 44th games is selected as a long weight effect generation game with a probability of 5/256.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66 and FIG. 67, the lottery value of the first game is “0”, and a long wait effect does not occur in the first game.

[Pseudo Bonus Medium Long Weight Lottery Table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of the long wait lottery table during the pseudo bonus. The pseudo weight bonus long weight lottery table is referred to in a long weight lottery process (see FIG. 91 described later) performed for each unit game during the pseudo bonus game period.

  The pseudo-bonus medium long weight lottery table defines, for each lottery opportunity, a correspondence between a winning / non-winning (lottery result) of a long weight effect (short lock occurrence) and a lottery value set for each lottery result. I do.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the long weight lottery during the pseudo bonus is performed when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) during the pseudo bonus is won and the rare role is internally won. . Then, a rare combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the effect drawing lottery flag of the name “watermelon”, “cherry”, “fixed”, or “middle cho”) is internally won, and the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is performed. , A long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is won with a probability of 32/256.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), a storage area for various control data, various flags, various counters, and the like used for various reel effects (various game locks) is also provided in the main RAM 53.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area and carryover combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 1 to 33 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 33, when “1” is set in a predetermined bit (when the bit is stored), the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the activated line. Indicates that On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the symbol combination relating to the winning has not been displayed on the activated line.

  In the main RAM 53, an internal winning combination storing area is provided. The internal winning combination storage area is configured similarly to the display combination storage area shown in FIG. When “1” is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 33, display of a symbol combination corresponding to each bit is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “losing”.

  In the main RAM 53, a carryover combination storage area is provided. The carryover combination storage area is configured similarly to the display combination storage area 1 shown in FIG. However, bits 1 to 7 of the storage area are unused.

  As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination corresponding to the symbol combination (display combination) with the name “C_BB” is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is determined as a carryover combination in a predetermined area in the carryover combination storage area. (Bit 0 area). The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is displayed until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination “Replay 3” — “watermelon 1” — “red 7” with the name “C_BB”) is displayed on the activated line. It is held without being cleared. Then, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is also stored in the internal win combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery. In other words, in the RT1 game state (state between BB flags) in which various games in the various effect game states described above are performed, a state in which “1” is stored in the bit 0 area of the internal winning combination storing area and the carryover storing area. Will be maintained.

[Gaming state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the gaming state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The game state flag storage area includes a game state flag storage area 1 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the gaming state flag, a unique bonus gaming state type or RT gaming state type is assigned to each bit of the gaming state flag storage area 1.

  When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit (standing) in the gaming state flag storage area 1, it indicates that a bonus game or RT operation corresponding to the predetermined bit is being performed. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, the operation of the BB is performed, indicating the BB game state, and “1” is set in bit 1 of the game state flag storage area 1. Is stored, the operation of the RB is being performed, indicating the RB gaming state. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 2 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the game is being played in the RT0 game state (general game state), and the game state flag storage area 1 When "1" is stored in the bit 3, it indicates that the game is being played in the RT1 game state (the state between the BB flags).

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag composed of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, when the left stop button 17L is the currently pressed stop button, that is, the operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. For example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in the bit 4. The main CPU 51 identifies a currently pressed stop button and a stop button that has not been pressed based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Pressing order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag composed of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of the pressing order of the stop button is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left center right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Symbol code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol code storage area, for each activated line, the symbol code of the symbol of the reel that has been stopped most recently (symbol code storage area 1 in the cross-down line) and a displayable combination (symbol code storage area in the cross-down line) 2 to 34) are stored. After all the reels are stopped, a symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in a symbol code storage area (symbol code storage areas 2 to 134 in the case of the cross-down line) in which a combination that can be displayed is stored.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 37). The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG.

[Pressing order flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the push order flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the push order flag storage area includes push order flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. Each bit is assigned the correct pressing order of the stop button (the type of the internally pressed pressing order bell).

  When “1” is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the pressing order flag storage areas 1 and 2, any one of the pressing order bells (names “F_123B1” to “F_321B2”) of the type corresponding to the predetermined bit is stored. Internal winning combination), that is, the internal winning combination related to the operation of the AT function has been won. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the pressing order bell has not been won.

  For example, when the name “F_123B1” is internally won, that is, when the correct push order of the stop button is “left center right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the push order flag storage area 1. . In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect game state is the pseudo bonus state and “1” is stored in the predetermined bit of the pressing order flag storage area, the answer of the stop button corresponding to the predetermined bit is correct. Is notified (push order navigation is executed). At this time, under the control of the main control circuit 41, information on the correct pressing order of the stop button is notified on the pressing order instruction display unit (not shown) provided on the pedestal unit 12, and the sub control circuit 42 Under the control, the pressing order navigation using the lamp group 21 is also performed.

[Direction game state storage area]
Next, the configuration of the effect game state storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The effect game state storage area stores an effect game state flag composed of 1 byte. In the effect game state flag, a corresponding effect game state is assigned to each bit.

  For example, when the effect game state is the general game state, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the effect game state storage area. Also, for example, when the effect game state is the notification waiting state, “1” is stored in bit 1 of the effect game state storage area, and when the effect game state is in the waiting state, the effect game state storage is performed. “1” is stored in bit 2 of the area. Further, for example, when the effect game state is the pseudo RB state, “1” is stored in bit 3 of the effect game state storage area, and when the effect game state is the pseudo BB state, the effect game state is stored. “1” is stored in bit 4 of the area.

[Effect lottery status storage area]
Next, the configuration of the effect lottery state storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The effect lottery state storage area stores an effect lottery state flag composed of 1 byte. In the effect lottery state flag, a corresponding effect lottery state (any one of modes 0 to 7) is assigned to each bit. For example, when the effect lottery state is mode 2, “1” is stored in bit 2 of the effect lottery state storage area.

<Various names of internal winning combinations used under control of sub CPU>
FIG. 77 shows the names of the internal winning combinations (hereinafter, referred to as “sub winning combinations”) managed on the sub control circuit 42 side (hereinafter, “sub side”) and the main control circuit 41 side (hereinafter, “main side”). ), And shows a correspondence table with the names of the above-described internal winning combinations (hereinafter, referred to as “main winning combination names”) managed in the above. The correspondence table shown in FIG. 77 shows the correspondence between the sub winning combination name managed on the sub side, the main winning combination name, the effect lottery flag name, and the main small combination winning number managed on the main side.

  The effect lottery flag name is a flag name referred to in the above-described pseudo bonus lottery table. The main small winning combination number is information on an internal winning combination set in a start command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42.

  The main winning combination names “losing” and “F_BB” are referred to as sub winning combinations “losing” and “BB” on the sub side, respectively. In addition, “0” is associated with both the main winning combination names of the main winning combination names “losing” and “F_BB”. That is, the main winning combination number “0” is associated with the sub winning combination names “losing” and “BB”.

  The main winning combination name “F_Replay” is referred to as a sub winning combination name “Replay” on the sub side. It should be noted that “1” is associated with the main winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_Replay”. That is, the main winning combination number “1” is associated with the sub winning combination name “Replay”.

  Each of the main winning combination names “F_123B1” to “F_321B1” is referred to as a sub winning combination name “push order bell” on the sub side. It should be noted that “2” is associated with each of the main winning combination numbers of the main winning combination names “F_123B1” to “F_321B1”. That is, the main winning combination number “2” is associated with the sub winning combination name “push order bell”.

  Both the main winning combination names “F_common B1” and “F_common B2” are referred to as sub winning combination names “common bell” on the sub side. It should be noted that “3” is associated with the main winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_common B1”, and “4” is associated with the main winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_common B2”. Are associated. That is, the main winning combination number “3” or “4” is associated with the sub winning combination name “common bell”.

  The main winning combination name “F_Special CH” is referred to as a sub winning combination name “Cherry” on the sub side. In addition, “5” is associated with the main small winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_Special CH”. That is, the main winning combination number “5” is associated with the sub winning combination name “Cherry”.

  The main winning combination name “F_special S1” and “F_special S2” are both called “watermelon” on the sub side. It should be noted that “6” is associated with the main winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_Special S1”, and “7” is associated with the main winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_Special S2”. Are associated. That is, the main winning combination number “6” or “7” is associated with the sub winning combination name “watermelon”.

  The main winning combination name “F_special SP1” and “F_special SP2” are both referred to as “sub-winning combination name” on the sub side. It should be noted that “8” is associated with the main winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_special SP1”, and “9” is associated with the main winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_special SP2”. Are associated. That is, the main winning combination number “8” or “9” is associated with the sub winning combination name “fixed winning combination”.

  The main winning combination name “F_special SP3” is called a sub winning combination name “confirmed cherry” on the sub side. Note that “10” is associated with the main small win symbol number of the main winning combination name “F_Special SP3”. In other words, the main winning combination number “10” is associated with the sub winning combination name “determined cherry”.

  The main winning combination name “F_special SPCH” is referred to as a sub winning combination name “middle cherry” on the sub side. It should be noted that “11” is associated with the main small winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_special SPCH”. That is, the main winning combination number “11” is associated with the sub winning combination name “middle cherry”.

  Further, the main winning combination names “F_RB combination 1” and “F_RB combination 2” are both referred to as sub winning combination names “RB combination” on the sub side. The main winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_RB combination 1” is associated with “12”, and the main winning combination number of the main winning combination name “F_RB combination 2” is “13”. Are associated. That is, the main winning combination number “12” or “13” is associated with the sub winning combination name “RB combination”.

<Various names of sub-effect flags used in various effect lottery processes on the sub side>
In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 performs winning / non-winning of a pseudo bonus, that is, a process of determining AT / winning. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub winning combination (sub winning combination name) described with reference to FIG. Is used. The sub-effect flag indicates a specific example of the effect parameter according to the present invention.

  FIG. 78 shows a correspondence relationship between the main small winning combination number and the AT winning type managed on the main side, the names of the sub effect flags managed on the sub side, and the sub effect flag numbers associated with the respective sub effect flags. Show. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, a sub effect flag number is separately provided for each type of gaming state (normal, pseudo BB, pseudo RB). In this example, the association between the sub-effect flag and the sub-effect flag number is the same regardless of the type of the game state (normal game, pseudo BB, pseudo RB), but the present invention is not limited to this. The association between the sub effect flag and the sub effect flag number may be changed for each type of gaming state (normal, pseudo BB, pseudo RB).

  The sub-effect flag of the name “losing” is obtained when the main small winning combination number is “0” (sub winning combination name “losing” or “BB”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is not won. This is a sub-effect flag set in a unit game (game). Then, “0” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “losing”. Also, in the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) of the game in which the next game pseudo BB or the next game pseudo RB has been won, basically, the sub effect flag of the name “watermelon, cherry + pseudo BB” described later is set. ), A sub-effect flag number “0” is set in the same manner as the sub-effect flag “losing”.

  In the sub effect flag of the name “Replay + Pseudo BB”, the main small winning combination number is “1” (Sub winning combination name “Replay”), and the current game pseudo BB or the next game pseudo BB is won in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the game is performed. The sub effect flag of the name “push order bell + pseudo BB” has the main small win winning number “2” (sub win combination name “push order bell”), and the current game pseudo BB or the next game in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the pseudo BB is won. In the sub effect flag with the name “common bell + pseudo BB”, the main small winning combination number is “3” or “4” (sub winning combination name “common bell”), and the current game simulation is performed in the normal game. This is a sub effect flag set in the game when BB or the next game pseudo BB is won. Then, “1” is set as the sub-effect flag number in each of the sub-effect flags “replay + pseudo BB”, “push order bell + pseudo BB”, and “common bell + pseudo BB”.

  In the sub effect flag of the name “Replay + pseudo RB”, the main small winning combination number is “1” (sub winning combination name “Replay”), and the current game pseudo RB or the next game pseudo RB is won in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag that is set in the game when the game is performed. The sub effect flag of the name “push order bell + pseudo RB” has a main small winning combination number of “2” (sub winning combination name “push order bell”), and the current game pseudo RB or the next game in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the pseudo RB is won. In the sub effect flag with the name “common bell + pseudo RB”, the main small winning combination number is “3” or “4” (sub winning combination name “common bell”), and the current game simulation is performed in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the unit game (game) when the RB or the next game pseudo RB is won. Then, “2” is set as the sub effect flag number in each of the sub effect flags “Replay + pseudo RB”, “push order bell + pseudo RB”, and “common bell + pseudo RB”.

  The sub effect flag with the name “Replay” is set in the game when the main small role winning number is “1” (sub winning combination name “Replay”) and AT (pseudo bonus) is not won. This is a sub effect flag. Then, “3” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “replay”.

  The sub-effect flag with the name “push order bell” indicates that the main small role winning number is “2” (sub-winning role name “push order bell”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is not won. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game. Then, “4” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “push order bell”.

  In the sub effect flag with the name “common bell”, the main small role winning number is “3” or “4” (sub winning combination name “common bell”), and AT (pseudo bonus) is not won. This is a sub-effect flag set in the current game. Then, “5” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “common bell”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “watermelon” is displayed when the main small winning combination number is “6” or “7” (sub winning combination name “watermelon”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is not won. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game. Then, “6” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “watermelon”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G consecutive)” has a main small role winning number of “6” or “7” (sub winning role name “watermelon”), and is the next game in the normal game The sub effect flag is set in the game when the pseudo BB is won or when the 1G consecutive stock lottery is won in the pseudo bonus game. Then, “7” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G consecutive)”. In the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) of the game in which the sub effect flag “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G)” is set, the sub effect flag is “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G)”. In this case, “7” is set as the sub-effect flag number. However, if the sub-effect flag is a sub-effect flag other than “watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G consecutive)”, “7” is set as the sub-effect flag number. "0" is set.

  In the sub effect flag of the name “watermelon + pseudo RB”, the main small winning combination number is “6” or “7” (sub winning combination name “watermelon”), and the next game pseudo RB is won in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the current game. Then, “8” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “watermelon + pseudo RB”.

  The sub-effect flag with the name “Cherry” is set in the game when the main small winning combination number is “5” (sub-winning combination name “Cherry”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is not won. This is a sub effect flag. Then, “9” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “Cherry”.

  In the sub effect flag of the name “Cherry + Pseudo BB (Cherry + 1G consecutive)”, the main small winning combination number is “5” (Sub winning combination name “Cherry”), and the next game pseudo BB is won in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag that is set in the game when the game is played or when the 1G consecutive lottery is won in the pseudo bonus game. Then, “10” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G consecutive)”. In addition, in the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) of the game in which the sub effect flag “cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G consecutive)” is set, the sub effect flag becomes “cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G consecutive)”. In this case, “10” is set as the sub-effect flag number. However, if the sub-effect flag is a sub-effect flag other than “Cherry + Pseudo BB (Cherry + 1G consecutive)”, “10” is set as the sub-effect flag number. "0" is set.

  The sub effect flag of the name “Cherry + Pseudo RB” has a main small winning combination number of “5” (sub winning combination name “Cherry”), and in the game when the next game pseudo RB is won in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag to be set. Then, “11” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “cherry + pseudo RB”.

  As for the sub-effect flag of the name “fixed combination”, the main small combination winning number is “8” or “9” (sub-fixed combination name “fixed combination”), and AT (pseudo bonus) is not won. This is a sub-effect flag set in the current game. Then, “12” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “fixed combination”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “fixed combination + pseudo BB (fixed combination + 1G consecutive)” has a main small combination winning number of “8” or “9” (sub winning combination name “fixed combination”) and a normal game. Is a sub effect flag set in the game when the next game pseudo BB is won or when the 1G consecutive lottery is won in the pseudo bonus game. Then, “13” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “fixed combination + pseudo BB (fixed combination + 1G consecutive)”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “fixed combination + pseudo RB” has a main small combination winning number of “8” or “9” (sub winning combination name “fixed combination”), and the next game pseudo RB is a normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game at the time of winning. Then, “14” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “fixed combination + pseudo RB”.

  The sub effect flag of the name "confirmed cherry" has a main small role winning number of "10" (sub winning combination name "confirmed cherry") and the AT (pseudo bonus) is not won in the game. This is a sub-effect flag to be set. Then, “15” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “confirmed cherry”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “confirmed cherry + pseudo BB (confirmed cherry + 1G consecutive)” has a main small winning combination number of “10” (sub winning combination name “confirmed cherry”), and is a normal game and a next game pseudo. This is a sub-effect flag that is set in the game when BB is won or when 1G consecutive lottery is won in a pseudo bonus game. Then, “16” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “determined cherry + pseudo BB (determined cherry + 1G consecutive)”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “confirmed cherry + pseudo RB” has a main small winning combination number of “10” (sub winning combination name “confirmed cherry”) and the next game pseudo RB is won in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game. Then, “17” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “determined cherry + pseudo RB”.

  The sub effect flag with the name “middle cherry” has a main small role winning number of “11” (sub winning combination name “middle cherry”) and the AT (pseudo bonus) is not won in the game. This is a sub-effect flag to be set. Then, “18” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “middle cherry”.

  The sub effect flag of the name “middle cherry + pseudo BB (middle cherry + 1G consecutive)” has a main small role winning number of “11” (sub winning combination name “middle cherry”), and a next game simulation in a normal game. This is a sub-effect flag that is set in the game when BB is won or when 1G consecutive lottery is won in a pseudo bonus game. Then, “19” is set as the sub effect flag number in the sub effect flag “middle cherry + pseudo BB (middle cherry + 1G consecutive)”.

  In the sub effect flag with the name “middle cherry + pseudo RB”, the main small role winning number is “11” (sub winning combination name “middle cherry”), and the next game pseudo RB is won in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the current game. Then, “20” is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag “middle cherry + pseudo RB”.

  The determination of whether or not the AT (pseudo bonus) has been won (including the success or failure of the 1G series) performed on the sub side is based on the number of pseudo bonus stocks included in the received start command (the value of the effect reservation counter). It is performed based on. Specifically, the sub side determines whether or not an AT (pseudo bonus) has been won in the current game based on the difference between the number of pseudo bonus stocks in the current game and the number of pseudo bonus stocks in the previous game. Is done. For example, if the stock number of the pseudo bonus in the current game is increased by “1” from the stock number of the pseudo bonus in the previous game, it is determined that the AT (pseudo bonus) has been won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only when the AT (pseudo bonus) is won in the normal game but also in the 1G consecutive lottery in the pseudo bonus game, the AT (pseudo bonus) is won on the sub side. Is determined.

  The determination of the type of the winning AT (pseudo bonus) on the sub side is also performed based on the information on the type of the AT (pseudo bonus) included in the received start command.

  As described above, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment having a specification for determining whether an AT (pseudo bonus) is won or not on the main side, the internal winning combination and the AT (pseudo bonus) are combined on the sub side as described above. The sub-effect flag is generated, and the contents of various effects controlled by the sub-side are determined using the sub-effect flag. By combining the internal winning combination with the AT (pseudo bonus) as described above, it is possible to reduce various processes such as the subsequent effect determination and to reduce the data amount of the data table and the like accompanying the lottery. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described sub-effect flag generation processing, the AT (pseudo bonus) winning / non-winning can also be determined on the sub side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is only necessary to transmit information indicating the state at the time of transmitting the command from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In this case, the control burden on the main side can be reduced.

<Structure of production instruction command>
As described above, the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment has a function of performing various reel effects (pseudo bonus start round effect, long weight effect, freeze, etc.) at the start of the game. Thus, in the present embodiment, consistency between the reel effect controlled on the main side and the effect produced by various effect devices (display device 11, lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R, etc.) at the time of the reel effect controlled on the sub side ( In order to improve the corresponding accuracy), a command called an “effect instruction command” is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 at each operation trigger in the reel effect. Then, the sub-control circuit 42 executes an effect corresponding to each trigger model, based on information (effect instruction parameter described later) on the type of the reel effect included in the received effect instruction command.

[Basic configuration of various commands]
First, before describing the data configuration of the production instruction command, a basic configuration (basic format) of various command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a basic (whole) configuration of various command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In the present embodiment, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 is composed of a command type section in which information of a command type is stored, and a parameter field section in which various information on games and effects are stored. Is done.

  The command type part is provided at the head of the command and is composed of eight bits (one byte).

  The parameter field section includes five data storage areas called “first parameter” to “fifth parameter”. In the present embodiment, since the command transmission / reception operation is repeatedly performed in units of 8 bits, the parameter field portion is also managed in units of 8 bits, and each parameter is configured with an 8-bit (1 byte) data storage area. That is, the number of bytes (data amount) of the entire command is 6 bytes (48 bits).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, an example in which the parameter field portion is configured by the first to fifth parameters, that is, an example in which the data length of the parameter field portion is fixed, will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. . Since the content and data amount of the information included in the command differ depending on the type of command, the data length of the parameter field portion may be variable for each command type. For example, the parameter field portion may be composed of the first to third parameters, or may be composed of only the first parameter, depending on the command type. In this case, the data amount of the command data can be reduced to a necessary minimum amount.

[Data structure of production instruction command]
Next, the configuration of the effect instruction command and the contents of various information included in the command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a bit-by-bit configuration of the production instruction command and the contents of various information stored in each bit. In the present embodiment, the storage area of the fifth parameter of the effect instruction command is not used.

(1) Command Type A value “21H” (hexadecimal: “00100001” in binary) indicating the type of the effect instruction command is stored in the command type portion of the effect instruction command.

(2) First Parameter In the storage area of bit 0 (b0) to bit 4 (b4) of the first parameter of the production instruction command, information (hereinafter, “production instruction parameter”) corresponding to various operation triggers during the reel production. Any of "01H" to "10H" (hexadecimal) is stored. The storage area of the first parameter bit 5 (b5) to bit 7 (b7) is unused.

  The effect instruction parameter “01H” is data indicating an operation trigger “start of effect game stop 7, 8”. Note that “production game stop 7” corresponds to a pseudo bonus start spinning drum production in which the reels automatically stop in the swing stop pattern described in FIG. 14, and “production game stop 8” corresponds to the long game stop described in FIG. This corresponds to a pseudo-bonus start round effect in which a reel automatically stops in a stop pattern. Then, the operation trigger “start of game stop for production 7, 8 start” is data indicating the start of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect in the swing stop pattern or the long stop pattern. Therefore, at the start of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the swing stop pattern or the long stop pattern, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “01H” is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is the main control command. The signal is transmitted from the circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “02H” is data indicating an operation trigger “end of the effect game stop 7, 8”. The operation trigger “end of the game stop for production 7, 8 end” is data indicating the end of the pseudo bonus start rotation effect in the swing stop pattern or the long stop pattern. Therefore, at the end of the swing bonus pattern or the long stop pattern pseudo bonus start round body effect, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “02H” is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is mainly controlled. The signal is transmitted from the circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “03H” is data indicating an operation trigger “effect game stop 5 (second half), start 6”. Note that “production game stop 5” corresponds to the pseudo bonus start spinning drum production in which the reel automatically stops in the re-stop pattern described in FIG. 13, and “production game stop 6” corresponds to the high-speed game stop described in FIG. This corresponds to a pseudo-bonus start round effect in which a reel automatically stops in a stop pattern. Then, the operation trigger “start of the game stop for production 5 (second half), start of 6” is the start and re-rotation of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the re-stop pattern (reel when changing “REG alignment” to “BIG alignment”). Re-moving operation), or data indicating the start of a pseudo-bonus start round body effect of a high-speed stop pattern. Therefore, at the time of the start and re-rotation of the pseudo-bonus start round body effect of the re-stop pattern, or at the start of the pseudo bonus start round body effect of the high-speed stop pattern, the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is stored. An effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “03H” is set is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit.

  The production instruction parameter “04H” is data indicating an operation trigger “production production game stop 5, 6 end”. The operation trigger “end of the game stop for production 5 or 6 end” is data indicating the end of the pseudo bonus start torso effect of the re-stop pattern or the high-speed stop pattern. Therefore, at the end of the pseudo-bonus start round effect of the re-stop pattern or the high-speed stop pattern, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “04H” is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is mainly controlled. The signal is transmitted from the circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “05H” is data indicating an operation trigger “pseudo press”. The operation trigger “pseudo-press” is data indicating that the stop button has been pseudo-pressed (not actually pressed by the player) during the reel effect (pseudo-bonus-starting-torso effect). Therefore, at the timing when the stop button is depressed during the reel effect (pseudo bonus start torso effect), the effect instruction parameter “05H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. The effect instruction command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. The effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “05H” is set is transmitted for each stop button (reel) that has been artificially pressed.

  The production instruction parameter “06H” is data indicating an operation trigger “pseudo stop”. The operation trigger “pseudo stop” is data indicating that the reel has been pseudo stopped in the reel effect (pseudo bonus start round effect). Therefore, when the reel is stopped in a pseudo manner during the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start round effect), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “06H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. Is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  Further, the production instruction command in which the production instruction parameter “06H” is set is transmitted for each reel to be pseudo stopped. In the pseudo bonus start round body effect of the stop pattern other than the all-round simultaneous stop pattern, since the reels are pseudo stopped one by one, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “06H” is set is transmitted three times. . On the other hand, in the pseudo bonus start round body effect of the all-body simultaneous stop pattern, since all reels are pseudo-stopped at the same time, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “06H” is set is transmitted once.

  The effect instruction parameter “07H” is data indicating an operation trigger “start of effect game stop 2”. The “game stop for effect 2” corresponds to a reel lock effect of the long freeze A or B. The operation trigger “start of game stop 2 for effect” is data indicating the start of the long freeze A or B reel lock effect. Therefore, at the start of the long freeze A or B reel lock effect, an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “07H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control. The signal is transmitted to the circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “08H” is data indicating an operation trigger “end of effect game stop 2”. The operation trigger “end of game stop 2 for effect” is data indicating the end of the reel lock effect of long freeze A or B. Therefore, at the end of the long freeze A or B reel lock effect, an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “08H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control. The signal is transmitted to the circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “09H” is data indicating an operation trigger “start of game stop 1 for effect”. Note that "game stop 1 for effect" corresponds to a long weight effect (effect of generating a short lock). The operation trigger “start of game stop 1 for effect” is data indicating the start of a long weight effect (effect of generating a short lock). Therefore, at the start of the long weight effect (the effect of generating a short lock), the main control circuit 41 sends an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “09H” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. It is transmitted to the control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “0AH” is data indicating the operation trigger “end of the effect game stop 1”. The operation trigger “end of the effect game stop 1” is data indicating the end of the long weight effect (effect of generating a short lock). Therefore, at the end of the long weight effect (the effect of generating a short lock), the main control circuit 41 sends an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0AH” is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4. It is transmitted to the control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “0BH” is data indicating an operation trigger “simulated rotation start”. The operation trigger “start of pseudo rotation” is data indicating that the pseudo rotation of the reels has been started after the reel effect (pseudo bonus start torso effect) has started. Therefore, after the start of the reel effect (pseudo bonus start rotation effect), at the start of rotation of the pseudo reel, an effect instruction in which the effect instruction parameter “0BH” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. The command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In the present embodiment, when a reel effect without a short lock (pseudo bonus start rotation effect) is executed, a reel rotation start command is issued before the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0BH” is set. The signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “0CH” is data indicating an operation trigger “start of effect game stop 4”. The “game stop for effect 4” corresponds to the pseudo bonus start reeling effect in which the reels are pseudo-stopped in the normal stop pattern (“REG aligned”) at the start of the pseudo RB described with reference to FIG. 10A. The operation trigger “start of game stop 4 for production” is data indicating the start of the pseudo bonus start rotation effect in the normal stop pattern (at the start of pseudo RB). Therefore, at the start of the pseudo-bonus start round body effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0CH” is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is issued. The signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “0DH” is data indicating the operation trigger “end of the effect game stop 4”. The operation trigger “end of the effect game stop 4” is data indicating the end of the pseudo-bonus start round body effect in the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB). Therefore, at the end of the pseudo-bonus start round body effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0DH” is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is issued. The signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The effect instruction parameter “0EH” is data indicating an operation trigger “start of effect game stop 3”. The "game stop for effect 3" corresponds to the pseudo bonus start reeling effect in which the reels are pseudo stopped in the normal stop pattern ("BIG aligned") at the start of the pseudo BB described with reference to FIG. 10B. Then, the operation trigger “start of game stop for effect 3 start” is data indicating the start of the pseudo bonus start round effect in the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB). Therefore, at the start of the pseudo-bonus start round effect in the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0EH” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is issued. The signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “0FH” is data indicating an operation trigger “completion of production game stop 3”. The operation trigger “end of the game stop for effect 3” is data indicating the end of the pseudo bonus start round body effect in the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB). Therefore, at the end of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect in the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “0FH” is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is issued. The signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

  The production instruction parameter “10H” is data indicating an operation trigger “restart rotation”. The operation trigger “restart rotation” is data indicating that the normal acceleration operation of the reels has been started after the reel effect (pseudo bonus start round body effect) has been completed. Therefore, when the normal acceleration operation of the reel is started after the end of the reel effect (pseudo bonus start torso effect), the effect instruction parameter “10H” is set in the storage area of the bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. The produced instruction command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

(3) Second Parameter In the case where “05H” is set as the production instruction parameter in the first parameter in the second parameter of the production instruction command (when the operation trigger is “pseudo press”), the pseudo press is performed. (Hereinafter, referred to as “pressed body”) is stored. The data of the pressed body is stored in bit 0 (b0) to bit 2 (b2) of the second parameter of the production instruction command. Further, the storage area for the bits 3 (b3) to 7 (b7) of the second parameter is unused.

  The spine pressing “001” is data indicating that the target reel of the pseudo press is the left reel 3L, and the spinning press “010” is data indicating that the target reel of the pseudo press is the middle reel 3C. In this case, the spine pressing “100” is data indicating that the target reel to be pseudo-pressed is the right reel 3R.

(4) Third Parameter In the third parameter of the production instruction command, if “05H” is set as the production instruction parameter in the first parameter (when the operation trigger is “pseudo press”), the pseudo press is performed. (Hereinafter referred to as “pressed position”) corresponding to the symbol position of the selected reel is stored. Specifically, information corresponding to any of the symbol positions “0” to “19” described with reference to FIG. 17 is stored in the third parameter as data of the pressed position. The data of the pressed position is stored in bit 0 (b0) to bit 4 (b4) of the third parameter of the production instruction command. The storage area of the third parameter bit 5 (b5) to bit 7 (b7) is unused.

(5) Fourth Parameter In the fourth parameter of the production instruction command, if “05H” is set as the production instruction parameter in the first parameter (when the operation trigger is “pseudo press”), the pseudo press is performed. Information (hereinafter, referred to as a “scheduled stop position”) corresponding to the symbol's scheduled stop position on the reel that has been set is stored. Specifically, information corresponding to any of the symbol positions “0” to “19” described with reference to FIG. 17 is stored in the fourth parameter as data of the expected stop position. In addition, the data of the scheduled pressing position is stored in bit 0 (b0) to bit 4 (b4) of the fourth parameter of the production instruction command. The storage area of the fourth parameter bit 5 (b5) to bit 7 (b7) is unused.

  As described above, at various occasions during a reel effect, when an effect instruction command including information indicating the opportunity is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42, the sub-side responds to each opportunity of the reel effect. It is possible to reliably and accurately execute the effect. Further, as in the present embodiment, by subdividing the transmission timing of the production instruction command during the reel production, it is possible to correct the difference between the reel production controlled on the main side and the various productions controlled on the sub side. it can.

  Further, by providing the above-described effect instruction command transmission function, for example, it is also possible to effect such that the output timing of the reel rotation start sound and the reel rotation start timing are shifted, such as a long weight effect. Can be performed. As a result, the player's interest in the reel effect can be increased.

<Other characteristic functions>
Next, other characteristic various functions of the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

[Weight sound generation function]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, at the start of the game, if the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has not elapsed, a wait sound is generated. Also, in the unit game in which the pseudo bonus is started and the pseudo bonus is started by pseudo displaying the “BIG alignment” or “REG alignment” by the pseudo bonus start torso effect, the weight sound generation condition is satisfied (at the start of the previous game). The wait sound is generated when the wait time (4.1 sec) has not elapsed since the start of the operation, and the wait sound is not generated when the wait sound generation condition is not satisfied (such as when a long freeze occurs).

  By providing such a function of generating a weight sound in the game in which the pseudo-bonus start torso effect is generated, the weight sound is generated in the pseudo-bonus notification game in which the pseudo-bonus start torso effect is generated, similarly to the normal game. appear. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the state of the pseudo bonus notification at the start of the game is locked, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the pseudo bonus start torso effect.

[Control function of lighting mode of stop button]
In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, a lighting lamp (not shown) is provided at each stop button to indicate whether a player's operation on the stop button is valid or invalid. When the player's operation on the stop button is in an invalid state, the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment lights the stop button in red with a lighting lamp (second notification mode), and the player's operation on the stop button. When the operation is in a valid state, the stop button is lit in blue by a lighting lamp (first notification mode). In addition, the lighting lamp provided in each stop button shows one specific example of the notification device according to the present invention.

  The operation (switching) control of the lighting mode of the stop button is performed by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side). Specifically, when the sub control circuit 42 receives a constant speed start command described later, the sub control circuit 42 changes the lighting mode of all the stop buttons to blue lighting (effective lighting mode). When the sub control circuit 42 receives a reel stop command described later, the sub control circuit 42 changes the lighting mode of the stop button corresponding to the target reel of the received reel stop command to red lighting (invalid lighting mode). Change. It should be noted that, even under the condition of blue lighting (effective lighting mode), if another operation (lever input or the like) is detected, the sub-control circuit 42 sets the lighting mode of the stop button to blue lighting (effective lighting mode). Mode) to red lighting (ineffective lighting mode).

  By managing the lighting mode of each stop button in the sub-control circuit 42 (sub-side) as described above, the processing amount and data amount in the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be reduced.

  In addition, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, even during the pseudo bonus start torso effect as described above, a pseudo rotation start operation and a stop operation of each reel, a pseudo stop operation (pseudo press) for each reel, and the like. At each time, the main control circuit 41 transmits an effect instruction command to the sub control circuit 42. In the present embodiment, the operation (switching) control of the lighting mode of the stop button described above may be performed at the time of receiving the effect instruction command even during the pseudo bonus start torso effect.

  For example, in addition to the types described in FIG. 80, as the types of the production instruction parameters, there are provided production instruction parameters indicating that the reel rotation speed has reached a specific speed (pseudo constant speed) after the start of the reel pseudo rotation, During the pseudo bonus start torso effect, if an effect instruction command in which data associated with “pseudo constant speed” is set as an effect instruction parameter is received by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side), The circuit 42 may change the lighting mode of all the stop buttons to blue lighting (effective lighting mode). Further, in this case, during the pseudo bonus start torso effect, when an effect instruction command in which “pseudo press” (05H) is set as the effect instruction parameter is received by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side), The sub control circuit 42 changes the lighting mode of the stop button that has been pseudo-pressed to red lighting (invalid lighting mode).

  Note that the control of the lighting mode of each stop button during the pseudo bonus start torso effect (reel effect) is executed by the sub-control circuit 42 as described above. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 controls the lighting mode (reporting mode) of the stop button based on the rendering instruction command received during the reel rendering (pseudo-bonus start body rendering) (pseudo reporting control). Means).

  In this way, even during the pseudo bonus start torso effect (reel effect), by performing the lighting effect of each stop button as in the normal case, the state of the pseudo bonus notification game at the start of the game is locked. Is difficult for the player to recognize, and a decrease in the player's interest in the pseudo bonus start torso effect can be suppressed. The constant speed (pseudo-constant speed) of the reel during the pseudo bonus start torso effect may be the same as that during normal operation or may be different.

[Demo migration management function]
In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the game is in a non-game state from the end of payout of medals until the medal insertion (including automatic insertion) of the next game is performed. In the present embodiment, the duration of the non-gaming state is monitored, and if the non-gaming state continues for a predetermined period, the state of the demonstration (hereinafter, simply referred to as “demo”) and / or the state of the power saving mode is changed. Set. In this case, for example, turning off of the seg, displaying a demonstration image, and the like are performed.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the monitoring of the duration of the non-game state is separately and independently performed on the main side and the sub-side. Specifically, a timer for monitoring the duration of the non-game state is separately provided on each of the main side and the sub side. Then, both timers are set so that the timing to start monitoring the duration of the non-game state and the timing to determine the transition to the demonstration on the main side substantially match those on the sub side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode, the main control circuit 41 (main side) performs the state for the demonstration and / or the power saving mode (non-game mode). The specific processing (for various states of power saving) for the state during the demonstration and / or the state of the power saving mode (for the non-gaming state) is performed by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side). The processing is started at substantially the same timing as the rendering processing (display processing of a demo image, etc.)

  By providing the non-game state monitoring function of the present embodiment described above, the following effects can be obtained. In a general pachislot, when starting the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode, a command called a “demo command” is transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub control circuit. Then, the sub-control circuit performs the demonstration control for the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode in response to the reception of the demonstration command.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the duration of the non-game state is independently monitored on each of the main side and the sub side, there is no need to provide a demo command. In this case, effects such as reduction of command types and processing load on the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be obtained.

[Medal payout count function]
The pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has a function (payout sound output function) of outputting payout sounds for notifying the medal from the loudspeakers 20L and 20R during payout processing of medals. The operation of the payout sound output function is controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, one medal is paid out each time a command called a “credit information command” indicating a trigger of the medal payout operation is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and a payout sound is generated. appear. Therefore, at the time of winning a small win, the credit information command (payout execution data) and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the small win are transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and a payout sound is generated. That is, the credit information command is continuously transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 at the payout operation interval of one medal by the number of payout times of the medal corresponding to the winning small combination, and the payout sound is generated. Occurs.

  At this time, the sub control circuit 42 counts the number of times the credit information command is continuously received, and outputs the payout sound when the number of times the credit information command is received reaches the payout number of medals corresponding to the winning small combination. Stop output control of. That is, the sub-control circuit 42 determines the timing of terminating the medal payout operation based on the number of times the credit information command has been received, and performs stop control of the payout sound.

  The following effects can be obtained by providing the counting function of the number of paid out medals described above. In a general pachislot, during the payout of medals, a credit information command is not only transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 every time one medal is paid out, as in the present embodiment, but also the medal is paid out. When the payout operation is completed, a command called a "payout end command" indicating the end of the medal payout operation is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. Then, on receipt of the payout end command, the sub side determines the timing of the medal payout operation end, and performs payout sound output stop processing.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 determines the timing of the medal payout operation end based on the number of times the credit information command has been received, and performs the payout sound output stop process. There is no need to provide. Therefore, in the present embodiment, an effect indicating that the medal is being paid out can be performed without using the payout end command. Further, in this case, effects such as reduction of command types and processing load on the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the result of the count function of the number of times the credit information command has been received is used in the determination control of the payout sound output end processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is necessary to switch the rendering process triggered by the end of the medal payout, the result of the credit information command reception count function can be used for any process. For example, the result of the count function of the number of times the credit information command has been received may be used for processing of video switching control at the end of payout of medals.

  Further, although not shown, the credit information command includes information on the number of payouts, and the information on the number of payouts is determined each time the credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 (one medal). Each time it is paid out, "1" is subtracted. That is, the information on the number of payouts included in the credit information command is the remaining number of payouts.

  In the present embodiment, even if the winning combination is a combination in which a medal such as a losing or a replay is not paid out, a credit information command including information that the payout number is 0 is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. Configuration. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 only at the time of the small prize winning.

[Medal payment function]
In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when a player presses a settlement button and a medal settlement (payout) process is started, during the medal settlement process, the speaker 20L, A function of outputting from 20R (adjustment sound output function) is provided. The operation of the settlement sound output function is controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the payment button, a command called a “payment sound command” indicating the start of the payment processing of the stored (credited) medals is sent to the main control circuit. 41 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42. The sub-control circuit 42 sets the state of the game to a settlement-in-progress state upon receipt of the settlement sound command (payment start data). Then, during the medal settlement process, each time one medal is settled (paid out), a credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and a settlement sound is generated. That is, during the medal settlement process, the credit information command is continuously transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by the number of times equal to the number of credits of the medal at the settlement (payout) operation interval of one medal. It is transmitted and a settlement sound is generated.

  The credit information command includes information on the number of medals currently being credited (the number of credits) as well as information on the number of medals to be paid out (remaining payout number). Then, during the medal settlement process, the number of credits is decremented by "1" each time a credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 (each time one medal is paid out).

  Therefore, when the credit control command is received, the current state is the payment status, and if the information on the number of credits included in the credit information command is “1” or more, the sub control circuit 42 outputs the payment sound. (Request) control. Then, the sub-control circuit 42 ends the settlement (payout) of all credited medals when the information on the number of credits included in the received credit information command becomes “0” in the settlement state. If so, the settlement process is stopped. Specifically, the sub-control circuit 42 cancels the check-in-progress state and performs output stop processing of the check-out sound.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a state in which the settlement sound continues to sound due to a power interruption or the like, the current state is the settlement state, the number of credits is 0, and If the adjustment sound is being output, the sub-control circuit 42 performs a process of stopping the output of the adjustment sound.

  Note that the no-operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 when there is no transmission data (for example, various commands such as a start command, a reel stop command, and a display command, which will be described later) relating to an operation essential for the game. Command to be executed. Although not shown, the no-operation command includes information on invalid operations such as a lever operation, a BET operation (a pressing operation of the MAX bet button 14 by the player), and an ON / OFF operation of a stop button when the operation is invalid. included.

  By providing the above-described medal settlement function (payment end function), the following effects can be obtained. In a general pachislot, during the settlement of medals, a credit information command is not only transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 every time one medal is settled, as in the present embodiment, At the end of the medal settlement operation, a payout end command indicating the end of the medal payout (payment) operation is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. Then, on receipt of the payout end command, the sub side determines the timing of terminating the medal settlement operation, and performs output stop control of the settlement sound.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 determines the timing of the end of the medal settlement (payout) operation based on the presence or absence of the settlement status and the information on the number of credits included in the credit information command. . Therefore, in this embodiment, output stop control of the settlement sound can be performed without using the payout end command. Further, in this case, effects such as reduction of command types and processing load on the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the result of the medal settlement function (payment termination function) is used in the determination control of the settlement sound output termination processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is necessary to switch the effect processing upon the completion of the medal settlement, the result of the medal settlement function can be used for any processing. For example, the result of the medal settlement function may be used for processing of video switching control at the end of settlement.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation of pachislot under control of main CPU]
First, a procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to a flowchart (hereinafter, referred to as a main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot 1, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, various initialization processes at the time of setting change, a process of determining whether backup has been performed normally, and the like are performed. The details of the initialization process at the time of turning on the power will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization processing, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area in which data must be deleted for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance / start check process (S3). In this process, a process of checking the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 16S, a process of determining the transition to the demonstration, and the like are performed. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of obtaining a random number value for internal winning combination lottery (S4). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for internal winning combination lottery and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect random number acquisition process (S5). In this process, the main CPU 51 obtains various effect random number values for determining contents related to operations such as an AT (pseudo bonus) function, a reel lock function, and a pseudo bonus start torso effect. More specifically, the main CPU 51 generates an effect random number for pseudo bonus lottery (0 to 65535), an effect random number for pseudo BB stock lottery (0 to 255), and an effect for the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery. Random number for random number (0-255), random number for effect for reel lock lottery (0-255), random number for effect for reel stop effect pattern lottery (0-255), random number for effect for mode shift lottery (0-255), an effect random number value for long-weight lottery (0-255), etc. are acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number for internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lottery process when the lever is on (S7). In this processing, based on the random number values for various effects extracted in S5 and the internal winning combination determined in S6, the operation contents such as an AT (pseudo bonus) function, a reel lock function, and a pseudo bonus start winding effect are performed. Various lottery processes are performed. The details of the lottery process when the lever is on will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command generation and storage process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The start command data includes an internal winning combination (main small combination winning number), presence / absence of a pseudo-bonus winning (the value of an effect reservation counter), presence / absence of a reel lock, presence / absence of a pseudo-bonus start rotation effect, and a notification lamp. Information on various lottery results such as lighting instructions is included.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a game weight digestion process, a process of requesting the start of rotation of all reels, a reel lock process, a reel control process of a pseudo bonus start reeling effect, and the like.

  In the weight digestion process in S10, if the predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed from the start of the previous unit game, the main CPU 51 waits until the predetermined wait time elapses. Digest time. Next, when it is not determined to perform the reel lock or the pseudo bonus start torso effect at the start of the game, normal acceleration processing is performed on the three reels.

  Specifically, after the predetermined wait time has been consumed, the main CPU 51 requests the rotation start of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is performed by an interrupt process (see FIG. 109 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is controlled to accelerate until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and thereafter, is controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a reel effect such as a reel lock or a pseudo bonus start reeling effect is to be performed at the start of the game, the main CPU 51 executes the above-described normal acceleration process of the reel in the process of S10. Then, data such as the determined reel lock and the pseudo-bonus start round effect are set, and those reel effects are performed. The details of the reel rotation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority storing process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this processing, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed, and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines a symbol combination displayed on an active line (winning determination line) after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R have stopped, and a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23). And. Then, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the activated line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a display command generation and storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a display command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The display command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the activated line, and can determine the execution timing of various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect process after the third stop (S15). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a process of executing a pseudo bonus END lock at the end of the pseudo bonus, a process of updating the effect game state at the end of the pseudo bonus, and the like. The details of the third post-stop effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal payout process (S16). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S13, and the medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, the payout number of medals differs depending on the display combination, but as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23), the maximum payout number of medals (upper payout) is seven. Become.

  In the process of S16, when the payment button is pressed by the player, payout (payment) of medals of the number of credits is performed. Further, in this process, a set process of a main demo transition timer for counting the duration of the non-game state is also performed. The details of the medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main demo transition timer is a specific example of the first monitoring unit according to the present invention.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end check process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters (not shown) for managing the end of the bonus (BB) game provided in the main RAM 53, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. I do. The details of the bonus end check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation check process (S18). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus (BB) game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the bonus operation check processing is completed, the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S2 and repeats the processing from S2.

[Initialization processing at power-on]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the initialization process at the time of power-on performed in S1 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a setting change switch (not shown) is on (S31).

  In S31, when the main CPU 51 determines that the setting change switch is in the ON state (if S31 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a setting change process (S32). The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later. Then, after the processing of S32, the main CPU 51 ends the initialization processing at the time of turning on the power, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 51 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (if S31 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a power interruption recovery process (S33). The details of the power interruption recovery processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later. Then, after the processing of S33, the main CPU 51 ends the initialization processing at the time of turning on the power, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process performed in S32 during the power-on initialization process (see FIG. 82) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process of the number of games released from the pseudo bonus (the number of games to be shifted to the next pseudo bonus) (S41). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets a value of “65535” to the number of games released from the pseudo bonus.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect lottery mode lottery process (S42). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the setting change mode shift lottery table (see FIG. 54) based on the changed settings (settings 1 to 6) and determines an effect lottery state (mode).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets a lottery result (any one of modes 0 to 7) of the effect lottery mode lottery process (S43). Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores “1” in a bit in the effect lottery state storage area (see FIG. 76) corresponding to the lottery result (one of modes 0 to 7).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery process (S44). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) based on the set effect lottery state (mode) and determines the next pseudo bonus shift game number. In this process, when the mode 3 is set, “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus shift game number. In this case, the main CPU 51 further sets the next pseudo bonus shift game number. The next pseudo bonus shift game number corresponding to the random number value is determined by referring to the correspondence table with the random number value (see FIG. 56).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the lottery result of the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery process (the next pseudo bonus shift game number) to the pseudo bonus release game number (S45). Then, after the process of S45, the main CPU 51 ends the setting change process, and also ends the initialization process at power-on (see FIG. 82).

[Power-off recovery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a description will be given of the power interruption recovery processing performed in S33 during the power-on initialization processing (see FIG. 82).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S51). In this determination process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

  In S51, when the main CPU 51 determines that the backup is normal (YES in S51), the main CPU 51 returns the set value to the state before the power failure based on the backup data (S52). Then, after the processing of S52, the main CPU 51 ends the power-off recovery processing and also ends the power-on initialization processing (see FIG. 82).

  On the other hand, in S51, when the main CPU 51 determines that the backup is not normal (NO in S51), the main CPU 51 performs power-on error processing (S53). In this process, the main CPU 51 notifies that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like.

[Medal acceptance / start check processing]
Next, the medal acceptance / start check processing performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether there is an automatic insertion request (S61). The presence or absence of this automatic insertion request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic insertion counter is “0”. That is, when the automatic insertion counter is “0”, the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic insertion request, and when the automatic insertion counter is “1” or more, it determines that there is an automatic insertion request.

  Note that the automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination relating to the replay in the previous unit game has been established. When the display combination relating to the replay is established, medals of the number inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  In S61, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (when S61 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an automatic insertion process (S62). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and thereafter, the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion command generation and storage process (S63). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a medal shooting command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. Note that the medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of medal insertions and the like, but the medal insertion command generated in S63 includes the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game (game startable number). Is set. Then, after the processing of S63, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S73 described later.

  On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (if S61 is NO), the main CPU 51 permits medal acceptance (S64). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals according to the gaming state (S65). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals to “3”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S66). In S66, when the main CPU 51 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted (NO in S66), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S73 described later.

  On the other hand, in S66, when the main CPU 51 determines that the medal acceptance is permitted (YES in S66), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion check process (S67). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and when a medal has been inserted, adds “1” to the inserted number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted based on the result of the check processing in S67 (S68).

  In S68, when the main CPU 51 determines that a medal has not been inserted (NO in S68), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S71 described later.

  On the other hand, in S68, when the main CPU 51 determines that a medal has been inserted (if S68 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion command generation and storage process (S69). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a medal shooting command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game startable number (S70). In the present embodiment, the number of games that can be started is “3”.

  In S70, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inserted number is the game startable number (if S70 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S73 described later.

  On the other hand, in S70, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inserted number is not the game startable number (NO in S70) or when NO in S68, the main CPU 51 sets the main demo transition timer to “0”. Is determined (S71). The main demo transition timer setting process is performed in a medal payout process described later (see FIG. 106 described later).

  In S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the main demo shift timer is not “0” (if S71 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S66, and repeats the processes from S66.

  On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the main demo shift timer is “0” (if S71 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the main demo flag to an ON state (S72). With this process, the process at the time of the demo shift is started. The main demonstration flag is a flag indicating whether or not the state of the game is shifted to the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode, and is stored in the main RAM 53. Then, after the processing in S72, the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S66, and repeats the processing from S66.

  Here, returning to the processing of S63, S66, and S70 again, after the processing of S63, if S66 is NO, or if S70 is YES, the main CPU 51 sets the main demonstration flag to the off state ( S73). At the time of this processing, if the state of the game is not the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode, in this processing, processing of maintaining the main demonstration flag in the off state is performed. On the other hand, at the time of this processing, if the state of the game is the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode, this processing is processing of updating the main demonstration flag from the on state to the off state. The state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode ends.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S74). In S74, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is not turned on (if S74 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S66 and repeats the processes from S66.

  On the other hand, in S74, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is ON (in the case of YES determination in S74), the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S75). With this processing, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medals are discharged from the medal payout opening 18. When this processing ends, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check processing, and moves the processing to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  As described above, the main control circuit 41 executes the process (S71) of determining whether or not the main demo shift timer during the medal acceptance / start check process of the present embodiment is “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 determines whether or not to perform processing in the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode (non-game state) based on the monitoring result by the main demonstration transition timer. (First non-game state determination means).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, an internal lottery process performed in S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S81). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 70) to grasp the current gaming state, and the type of the internal lottery table to be used (any of the internal lottery tables in FIGS. 25 to 27). To determine.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random number value for internal lottery stored in the random number value storage area (S82). Then, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value for internal lottery (S83).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result (subtraction result) in S83 is less than “0” (negative value) (S84). In S84, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than “0” (if S84 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S87 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S84 that the calculation result is not less than “0” (NO in S84), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S85). Specifically, the value of the calculation result (subtraction result) is set to a random number value, and the winning number is incremented by “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S86). In S86, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO in S86), the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S83 and repeats the processing from S83.

  On the other hand, in S86, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the winning numbers have been checked (if S86 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S88 described later.

  Here, returning to the process of S84 again, if the determination of S84 is YES (if a digit is generated in the subtraction process), the main CPU 51 sets the small combination / replay data pointer corresponding to the winning number with the digit generated. Then, a bonus data pointer is obtained (S87).

  After the process of S87 or in the case of YES determination in S86, the main CPU 51 refers to the symbol combination determination table (see FIGS. 28 to 36), and based on the small combination / replay data pointer, the internal winning combination (a display capable of winning). Role) is acquired (S88). Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination (display winning combination) in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 69) (S89).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S90). In S90, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (if S90 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S95 described later.

  On the other hand, in S90, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (if S90 is YES), the main CPU 51 executes the symbol combination determination table (FIG. 28 to FIG. 28). Referring to FIG. 36), an internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S91).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S92).

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the carryover combination storage area and determines whether or not the BB is carrying over (S93). In S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that BB is not being carried over (if S93 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S95 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S93 that the BB is being carried over (if S93 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the RT1 gaming state as the gaming state (S94). Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores (sets) “1” in bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 70).

  After the processing of S94, or when S90 or S93 is NO, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S95). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  As described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also functions as an internal winning combination determining unit (internal winning combination determining unit).

[Lottery at Lever ON]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of the lever-on lottery process performed in S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  First, the main CPU 51 performs an effect lottery flag generation process (S101). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets an effect lottery flag corresponding to the internal winning combination to an on state, and sets other effect lottery flags to an off state. For example, when the internal winning combination with the name “F_123B1” is won, the main CPU 51 sets only the effect lottery flag with the name “normal combination” to the ON state (see FIGS. 25 and 26). Further, for example, even when the internal winning combination with the name “F_Replay” is won, the main CPU 51 sets only the effect lottery flag with the name “normal combination” to the ON state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the BB gaming state (S102).

  In S102, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is the BB gaming state (in the case of YES determination in S102), the main CPU 51 ends the lever-on lottery process, and proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to S8. On the other hand, in S102, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is not the BB gaming state (if S102 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is a notification waiting state (S103). ).

  In S103, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the notification waiting state (if S103 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S105 described later. On the other hand, in S103, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the notification waiting state (if S103 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the state of waiting for the effect game state (S104).

  After the processing of S104 or when the determination of S103 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a normal medium lottery process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery) and a reel lock lottery. Details of the normal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a mode shift lottery process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a lottery for shifting to a mode (effect lottery state) at the start of the pseudo bonus and a game number for the next pseudo bonus transition. The details of the mode shift lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a stock lottery process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a random lottery of a pseudo BB (1G series) stock and a long weight effect. The details of the stock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect lottery process (S108). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a lottery of a reel stop effect pattern of a pseudo bonus start rotation effect performed at the start of the pseudo bonus. The details of the reel effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S108, the main CPU 51 ends the lever-on lottery process, and shifts the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Normal lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the normal lottery process performed in S105 in the flowchart of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the normal game state (S111).

  In S111, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the normal game state (if S111 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the normal medium lottery processing and sets the processing to the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 87). Move to S106). On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S111 that the effect game state is the normal game state (if S111 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of false bonus cancellation games is “0”. It is determined whether or not the current game is a game at the time when the ceiling is established (S112).

  In S112, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of games for canceling the pseudo bonus is “0” (if S112 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets a game number cancel flag to an ON state (S113). At this time, the main CPU 51 sets other effect winning trigger flags to the off state. On the other hand, in S112, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of games released from the pseudo bonus is not “0” (if S112 is NO), the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the number of games released from the pseudo bonus (S114). .

  After the processing of S113 or S114, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (S115). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery table (see FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, etc.), and based on the current effect lottery state (mode), setting and effect lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the like. Pseudo bonus winning / non-winning, type of pseudo bonus at the time of winning and notification timing (the pseudo bonus types “current game pseudo RB”, “current game pseudo BB”, “next game pseudo BB”, and “next game time pseudo” BB ”).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets a lottery result of the pseudo bonus lottery process (S116). When the pseudo bonus lottery is won, in this processing, a set processing of the won pseudo bonus type, a processing of updating the value of the effect reservation counter (1 addition), and the like are performed. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S117).

  In S117, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus has not been won (if S117 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process and proceeds to the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Move to S106. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S117 that the pseudo bonus has been won (YES in S117), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number-of-games release flag is on (S118).

  In S118, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number-of-games release flag is on (in the case of YES determination in S118), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S120 described later. On the other hand, in S118, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number-of-games release flag is not in the ON state (in the case of NO determination in S118), the main CPU 51 performs an effect winning update flag updating process (S119). In this process, the effect winning trigger flag corresponding to the pseudo bonus winning trigger (other than the cancellation of the number of games) is set to the ON state, and the other effect winning trigger flags are set to the OFF state. For example, when the lottery opportunity of the pseudo bonus is “watermelon” and the pseudo bonus is won, the watermelon release flag is set to the ON state, and the other effect winning trigger flags are set to the OFF state.

  After the process of S119 or when the determination of S118 is YES, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus setting process (S120). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets an initial value of the number of remaining pseudo bonus games corresponding to the type of the pseudo bonus that has been won. If the type of the winning pseudo bonus is “current game pseudo BB” or “next game pseudo BB”, “70” is set as the initial value of the remaining number of pseudo bonus games, and the type of the winning pseudo bonus is “ If it is the "current game pseudo RB" or the "next game pseudo RB", "20" is set as the initial value of the remaining pseudo bonus game number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect game state update process (S121). In this processing, for example, when the type of the pseudo bonus that has been won is “current game pseudo RB” or “current game pseudo BB”, the main CPU 51 sets a waiting state in which the effect game state is set. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores data “1” in bit 2 (matching wait state) of the effect game state storage area (see FIG. 75). In addition, for example, when the type of the pseudo bonus that has been won is “next game pseudo RB” or “next game pseudo BB”, the main CPU 51 sets the effect waiting state to the notification game state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores data “1” in bit 1 (notification waiting state) of the effect game state storage area (see FIG. 75).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process of the number of games released from the pseudo bonus (the number of games to be shifted to the next pseudo bonus) (S122). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets a value of “65535” to the number of games released from the pseudo bonus.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel lock lottery process (S123). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel lock lottery table (see FIGS. 40 to 47), and sets the current effect lottery state (mode), the winning type of the pseudo bonus, the effect lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the like. Based on the winning / non-winning of the reel lock and the reel lock type at the time of the win (“short lock”, “freeze A”, “freeze B”, “short lock + freeze A” or “short lock + freeze B”) ).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not to perform the reel lock based on the lottery result of the reel lock lottery process (S124). In S124, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel lock is not performed (NO in S124), the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process and proceeds to S106 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Transfer to

  On the other hand, in S124, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel lock is performed (YES in S124), the main CPU 51 performs an effect reservation flag updating process (S125). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the effect reservation flag corresponding to the reel lock type determined by the reel lock lottery to the ON state. For example, when the type of the reel lock determined by the reel lock random determination is “short lock”, the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the ON state, and the type of the reel lock determined by the reel lock random determination is set. In the case of “freeze A”, the main CPU 51 sets a freeze A flag to an on state. For example, when the type of the reel lock determined by the reel lock lottery is “short lock + freeze A”, the main CPU 51 sets both the short lock flag and the freeze A flag to the ON state.

  Then, after the process of S125, the main CPU 51 ends the normal medium lottery process, and moves the process to S106 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

  As described above, the pseudo bonus lottery process (S115) during the normal medium lottery process is executed by the main control circuit 41. In addition, the main control circuit 41 executes the stock lottery process (S107) of the pseudo BB (1G series) during the normal lottery process during the lever-on lottery process described in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 determines the presence or absence of the transition to the pseudo bonus state (reporting game state) and the transition to the pseudo bonus state (reporting game state) (1G stock). (Notification game determining means) that determines the presence / absence of the game.

[Mode shift lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, a description will be given of the mode shift lottery process performed in S106 in the flowchart of the lottery process when the lever is on (see FIG. 87).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all effect winning trigger flags are in the off state or whether the pseudo BB stock release flag is in the on state (S131).

  In S131, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S131 is satisfied (if S131 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the mode shift lottery process and proceeds to the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Move to S107. That is, in the present embodiment, the mode shift lottery is not performed not only when the pseudo bonus is not started but also when the pseudo bonus game is continued by discharging the 1G continuous pseudo BB.

  On the other hand, in S131, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S131 is not satisfied (NO in S131), the main CPU 51 performs a mode shift lottery process (S132). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo bonus start mode shift lottery table (see FIGS. 48 to 51), and presents the effect lottery state (mode), the type of the pseudo bonus to be started, the setting, and the effect lottery flag. Based on (internal winning combination) and the like, the effect lottery state (any one of modes 0 to 7) of the transition destination is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect lottery state update process based on the lottery result of the mode shift lottery process (S133). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery process (S134). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) based on the set effect lottery state (mode) and determines the next pseudo bonus shift game number. In this process, when the mode 3 is set, “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus shift game number. In this case, the main CPU 51 further sets the next pseudo bonus shift game number. The next pseudo bonus shift game number corresponding to the random number value is determined by referring to the correspondence table with the random number value (see FIG. 56).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of updating the number of games released from the pseudo bonus (S135). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the next pseudo bonus shift game number obtained in the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery process to the pseudo bonus release game number. Then, after the process of S135, the main CPU 51 ends the mode shift lottery process, and shifts the process to S107 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

[Stock lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91, a description will be given of the stock lottery processing performed in S107 in the flowchart of the lottery processing at the time of lever ON (see FIG. 87).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the normal game state or the notification waiting state (S141).

  In S141, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the normal game state or the notification waiting state (if S141 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the stock lottery process and proceeds to the lever-on lottery process. The process moves to S108 (see FIG. 87). On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the normal game state or the notification waiting state (if S141 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the effect game state is in the waiting state. Is determined (S142).

  In S142, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not in the waiting state (S142 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S149 described later.

  On the other hand, in S142, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is in the waiting state (S142: YES), the main CPU 51 performs a stock lottery process (at the start of a pseudo bonus) (S143). . In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus (see FIGS. 57A and 57B), and performs the pseudo bonus based on the type of the pseudo bonus to be started and the current effect lottery state (mode). BB stock winning / non-winning is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stock lottery process has been won (S144).

  In S144, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stock lottery process has not been won (if S144 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S149 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S144 that the stock lottery process has been won (YES in S144), the main CPU 51 adds “1” to the value of the effect reservation counter (S145). The effect reservation counter is a counter that counts the number of pseudo BB stocks, and is provided in the main RAM 53.

  After the process of S145, the main CPU 51 performs a long-weight lottery process (at the start of a pseudo bonus) (S146). In this processing, the main CPU 51 refers to the long wait lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus (see FIGS. 63A to 63D), and determines the type of the pseudo bonus to be started and whether or not the stock lottery has been won (the presence or absence of the 1G-series pseudo BB). ), A winning / non-winning of a long weight effect (short rock) is determined. In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the long weight generation game lottery table (see FIGS. 64 to 67) and determines the type of the pseudo bonus to be started and whether or not the stock lottery has been won (the presence or absence of the 1G continuous pseudo BB). ), A game in which a long weight effect is generated is determined. If the long weight lottery is won at the start of the pseudo RB, one of the unit games of the second game to the twentieth game during the pseudo RB game period is determined as the game in which the long weight effect is generated. If the long weight lottery is won at the start of the pseudo BB, any one of the unit games of the second game to the 70th game during the pseudo BB game period is determined as the game in which the long weight effect is generated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a long weight lottery process (at the start of a pseudo bonus) has been won (S147).

  In S147, when the main CPU 51 determines that the long weight lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) has not been won (if S147 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S151 described later. On the other hand, in S147, when the main CPU 51 determines that the long weight lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) has been won (if S147 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the winning result to the number of long weight occurrence games. (S148).

  After the process of S148, or when S142 or S144 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current game is a game in which a long weight effect is generated (S149). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a process of determining whether or not the current game is a game in which a long weight effect is generated, based on the set number of long weight generating games and the current number of remaining pseudo bonus games. .

  In S149, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current game is not a game in which a long weight effect is generated (if S149 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S151 described later. On the other hand, in S149, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current game is a game in which a long weight effect is generated (YES in S149), the main CPU 51 sets a short lock flag to an ON state (S150).

  After the process of S150, or when S147 or S149 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a stock lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) (S151). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo-bonus pseudo-BB stock lottery table (see FIG. 58) and determines the stock win / non-win of the pseudo BB based on the effect lottery flag (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stock lottery process has been won (S152).

  In S152, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stock lottery process has not been won (NO in S152), the main CPU 51 ends the stock lottery process and proceeds to the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Move to S108.

  On the other hand, in S152, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stock lottery process has been won (if S152 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a mode shift lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) (S153). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo bonus medium mode shift lottery table (see FIGS. 52 and 53) and shifts based on the current effect lottery state (mode) and the effect lottery flag (internal winning combination). The effect lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process of the number of games released from the pseudo bonus (S154). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets “65535” to the number of games released from the pseudo bonus. Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect lottery state (mode) update process based on the lottery result of the mode shift lottery process (S155).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery process (S156). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) based on the updated effect lottery state (mode) and determines the next pseudo bonus shift game number. In this process, when the mode 3 is set, “100 to 199” is determined as the next pseudo bonus shift game number. In this case, the main CPU 51 further sets the next pseudo bonus shift game number. The next pseudo bonus shift game number corresponding to the random number value is determined by referring to the correspondence table with the random number value (see FIG. 56).

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the number of games released from the pseudo bonus (S157). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the next pseudo bonus shift game number obtained in the next pseudo bonus shift game number lottery process to the pseudo bonus release game number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a long-weight lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) (S158). In this processing, the main CPU 51 refers to the long wait lottery table during pseudo bonus (see FIG. 68), and determines whether or not the production lottery flag (internal winning combination) and whether the stock lottery has been won (the presence or absence of the 1G continuous pseudo BB). Based on this, the winning / non-winning of the long weight effect (short rock) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a long weight lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) has been won (S159).

  In S159, when the main CPU 51 determines that the long weight lottery process (during the pseudo bonus) has not been won (if S159 is NO), the main CPU 51 executes the process of S161 described later.

  On the other hand, in S159, when the main CPU 51 determines that the long-weight lottery process (during the pseudo bonus) has been won (if S159 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the ON state (S160). . If the short lock flag is already on before the processing of S160 (if the processing of S150 described above is performed in the current game), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the on state in the processing of S160. Is performed.

  After the process of S160 or when the determination of S159 is NO, the main CPU 51 adds “1” to the value of the effect reservation counter (S161). Then, after the process of S161, the main CPU 51 ends the stock lottery process, and shifts the process to S108 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the stock lottery process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 determines whether or not to execute the 1G-series pseudo BB after the end of the pseudo bonus game period in the game (including the start game) during the pseudo bonus. Notification game continuation determining means and notification game determining means). Further, in the present embodiment, the long weight lottery process (S146 and S158) during the stock lottery process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also functions as a means (lock effect determination means) for determining whether or not to execute a long weight effect and for determining a long weight generation game.

[Reel effect lottery process]
Next, the reel effect lottery process performed in S108 in the flowchart of the lottery process at the time of lever ON (see FIG. 87) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is a waiting state (S171).

  In S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not in the waiting state (when S171 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect lottery process and the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Also ends.

  On the other hand, in S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is in the waiting state (when S171 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect lottery process (at the start of a pseudo bonus) (S172). . In this process, the pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table (see FIGS. 59 to 62) is referred to, and based on the current effect lottery state (mode), the winning type of the pseudo bonus, and the presence or absence of the freeze, the pseudo bonus start is performed. The reel stop effect pattern (any of pattern Nos. 0 to 27) in the torso effect is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets stop line selection information of the symbol combination (BIG or REG aligned) to be automatically stopped based on the lottery result of the reel effect lottery process (S173). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the stop position information of the symbol combination (BIG alignment or REG alignment) to be automatically stopped based on the lottery result of the reel effect lottery process (S174).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the reel stop order information (left middle right, right middle left or simultaneous) based on the lottery result of the reel effect lottery process (S175). Then, after the process of S175, the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect lottery process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, the reel stop initialization processing performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the BB gaming state (S181).

  In S181, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is the BB gaming state (if S181 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S183 described later. On the other hand, in S181, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is not the BB gaming state (if S181 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the value of the small part / replay data pointer as the number for the torso stop. (S182).

  After the processing of S182 or when YES is determined in S181, the main CPU 51 refers to a reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and, based on the acquired spinner stop number, various information corresponding to the spinner stop number. Is acquired (S183). In this processing, the numbers of the reel stop tables used during the first to third stops and information necessary for the control change processing (when the reels are stopped in a specific order and stopped at a specific position, Again, information for reselecting the stop table) is obtained.

  In the reel stop initial setting table, a correspondence relationship between the number for turning the drum and various kinds of information such as pull-in priority table selection data and a pull-in priority table number, which will be described later, is defined. The stop table is a table that directly or indirectly defines information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position of the stop button. In this stop table, using the specified information, the number of sliding pieces so that the reel stops at the stop position intended by the designer so as not to give a disadvantage to the player and not to generate a false prize. Is stipulated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73) (S184).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores “3” in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S185). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 81). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Reel rotation start processing]
Next, a reel rotation start process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not to execute a reel effect (S191). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not at least one of the effect reservation flag and various information (stop effect pattern) relating to the pseudo bonus start body effect is set. When at least one of the effect reservation flag and the various information (stop effect pattern) relating to the pseudo bonus start rotation effect is set, the main CPU 51 determines that the reel effect is to be executed.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S191 that the reel effect is not to be executed (NO in S191), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time (4.1 sec) has elapsed since the start of the previous game. (S192).

  In S192, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game (if S192 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S192.

  On the other hand, in S192, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time from the start of the previous game has elapsed (if S192 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs reel normal acceleration processing (S193). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts a reel acceleration control process for accelerating all reels to a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start command generation and storage process (S194). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The reel rotation start command includes a parameter indicating that the reel acceleration control process has started.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (S195).

  In S195, when the main CPU 51 determines that the rotation speed of each reel has not reached the predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when S195 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S195.

  On the other hand, in S195, when the main CPU 51 determines that the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when S195 is YES), the main CPU 51 executes the constant speed start command generation and storage process. Is performed (S196). In this processing, the main CPU 51 generates data of a constant speed start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The constant speed start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The constant speed start command includes a parameter indicating that the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed).

  Then, after the processing of S196, the main CPU 51 ends the reel rotation start processing, and moves the processing to S11 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  Here, returning to the process of S191 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S191 that the reel effect is to be executed (YES in S191), the main CPU 51 performs a process of executing the reel effect (S197). The details of the reel effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the processing of S197, the main CPU 51 ends the reel rotation start processing, and moves the processing to S11 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in S192 during the reel rotation start processing, it is determined whether or not the wait time has elapsed since the start of the previous game. The wait state is maintained without starting the processing. This process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 determines whether or not the wait time has elapsed since the start of the previous game, and if the wait time has not elapsed, the main control circuit 41 does not start the reel rotation operation. (Weight executing means).

[Reel effect execution process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a description will be given of the reel effect execution process performed in S197 during the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 94).

  First, the main CPU 51 sets a notification wait time (2000 msec) in a timer (S201). The subtraction process (counting process) of the timer that counts the notification wait time is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a wait time (4.1 sec) has elapsed from the start of the previous game (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game (if S202 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the processing of S202.

  On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time from the start of the previous game has elapsed (if S202 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a production instruction command (production start) generation and storage process ( S203). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  In the effect instruction command generated in this process, an effect instruction parameter indicating the start of execution of a reel effect (pseudo bonus start torso effect) is set. Specifically, in the production instruction command having the data configuration shown in FIG. 80, 01H (production game stop 7, 8 start), 03H (production game stop 5 (second half), 6 start), 07H as production instruction parameters Depending on the effect pattern to be executed, one of (start of game stop for effect 2), 09H (start of stop of effect game 4), 0CH (start of stop of effect game 4), and 0EH (start of effect game stop 3) Set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel lock process (S204). When the reel lock (“short lock”, “freeze A”, “freeze B”, “short lock + freeze A” or “short lock + freeze B”) is determined by the reel lock lottery, The CPU 51 performs the determined reel lock execution process. The details of the reel lock process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (pseudo rotation start) generation and storage process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  In the effect instruction command generated in this process, an effect instruction parameter indicating the start of the reel pseudo rotation operation in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect is set. Specifically, in the effect instruction command having the data configuration shown in FIG. 80, 0BH (start of pseudo rotation) is set as the effect instruction parameter. When the reel effect is an effect accompanied by a short lock (long weight effect), a rotation start sound is generated at the timing when the effect instruction command generated in S205 is received by the sub-control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets reel stop preparation data (S206). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets execution data of the above-described stop preparation operation 1. Specifically, during the rotation of the reel, the relative positional relationship between the symbol “Red 7” on the left reel 3L, the symbol “Red 7” on the middle reel 3C, and the symbol “Red 7” on the right reel 3R, or The rotation speed and the like of each reel are set so that the relative positional relationship between the symbol "Red 7" on the reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" on the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "BAR" on the right reel 3R is a predetermined positional relationship. Data for fine adjustment is set. This data is appropriately changed according to the automatic stop effect pattern of the set reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect control process during stop preparation (S207). In this process, based on the data set in S206, the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol "red 7" of the left reel 3L, the symbol "red 7" of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "red 7" of the right reel 3R are being rotated during rotation of the reels. The relative positional relationship of "Red 7" or the relative positional relationship of the symbol "Red 7" on the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" on the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "BAR" on the right reel 3R is a predetermined position. The rotation operation of each reel is controlled so as to have a relationship.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the notification wait time (2000 msec) has elapsed (S208). That is, the main CPU 51 performs the process of the stop preparation operation 2 described above.

  In S208, when the main CPU 51 determines that the notification wait time has not elapsed (NO in S208), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S208. If a long freeze such as freeze A or freeze B is executed in the reel lock process in S204, S208 is automatically determined as YES.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S208 that the notification wait time has elapsed (YES in S208), the main CPU 51 performs a reel automatic stop process (S209). In this process, the reel automatic stop control process is performed based on the set reel stop effect pattern (stop reel of reel automatic stop effect) in the set pseudo bonus start rotation effect. The details of the reel automatic stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus display process (S210). In this processing, when the symbol combination relating to the pseudo bonus is automatically stopped, a waiting time for executing various effects performed under the control of the sub control circuit 42 is set. The details of the pseudo bonus display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus initialization process (S211). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a process of outputting a pseudo bonus start signal (external signal) to the external terminal board 18S, a process of locking a pseudo bonus winning, a process of stopping a reel effect, and the like. The details of the pseudo bonus initialization processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a normal acceleration restart process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts a reel acceleration control process for accelerating all reels to a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (rotation restart) generation and storage process (S213). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  In the effect instruction command generated in this process, an effect instruction parameter indicating that the pseudo-bonus start round effect has ended and the normal acceleration process has been restarted is set. Specifically, in the effect instruction command having the data configuration shown in FIG. 80, 10H (restart rotation) is set as the effect instruction parameter. In other words, in the unit game in which the pseudo bonus start rotation effect is executed, at the start of the normal acceleration process, instead of the reel rotation start command, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter (10H) of “restart rotation” is set. It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42. Note that the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel rotation start command may be transmitted before or after the transmission of the production instruction command in which the production instruction parameter (10H) of “restart rotation” is set. In this case, before or after the process of S214, a reel rotation start command generation and storage process is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (S214).

  In S214, when the main CPU 51 determines that the rotation speed of each reel has not reached the predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (if S214 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S214.

  On the other hand, in S214, when the main CPU 51 determines that the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (if S214 is YES), the main CPU 51 executes the constant speed start command generation and storage process. Is performed (S215). In this processing, the main CPU 51 generates data of a constant speed start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The constant speed start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the processing of S215, the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect execution processing and ends the reel rotation start processing (see FIG. 94).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel effect execution process (the execution process of the pseudo bonus start rotation effect) is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for executing a pseudo bonus start torso effect (display column effect executing means, effect executing means). In addition, the main control circuit 41 executes the process of determining whether the notification wait time has elapsed in S208 during the reel effect execution process. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for determining whether or not the notification wait time has elapsed (elapsed time determination means).

[Reel lock processing]
Next, the reel lock process performed in S204 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution process (see FIG. 95) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the short lock flag is on (S221).

  In S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the short lock flag is not in the ON state (when S221 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S226 described later. On the other hand, in S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the short lock flag is in the ON state (if S221 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets a lock time for short lock (for example, 1000 msec) (S222). The subtraction process of the timer for counting the execution time of the short lock is performed by a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the lock time for short lock has elapsed (S223).

  In S223, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock time for short lock has not elapsed (NO in S223), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S223 that the lock time for short lock has elapsed (YES in S223), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to an off state (S224).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel acceleration start process (S225). By this process, the pseudo bonus start round effect is started. Note that, in the pseudo-bonus start torso effect of the present embodiment, at the timing immediately before the reel acceleration start processing in S225, a notification effect of the pseudo bonus winning (start) (lighting effect of the notification lamp) is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42. Is performed. Then, after the process of S225, the main CPU 51 ends the reel lock process, and moves the process to S205 of the reel effect execution process (see FIG. 95).

  Here, returning to the process of S221 again, if the determination of S221 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze A flag is on and the current game is a pseudo bonus notification game (start game). Is determined (S226). The determination as to whether or not the current game is a pseudo bonus notification game (start game) is made based on the effect game state, and when the effect game state is in a waiting state, the main CPU 51 determines whether the current game is in the waiting state. It is determined that the game is a pseudo bonus notification game (start game).

  In S226, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S226 is not satisfied (when S226 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S230 described later. On the other hand, in S226, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S226 is satisfied (if S226 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets a lock time for freeze A (for example, 30000 msec) (S227). Note that the timer subtraction process for counting the execution time of freeze A is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze A lock time has elapsed (S228).

  In S228, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock time for freeze A has not elapsed (if S228 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S228. On the other hand, in S228, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze A lock time has elapsed (if S228 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the freeze A flag to an off state (S229).

  After the process of S229 or when the determination of S226 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze B flag is on and the current game is a pseudo bonus notification game (start game) (S230). .

  In S230, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S230 is not satisfied (if S230 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S233 described later. On the other hand, in S230, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S230 is satisfied (YES in S230), the main CPU 51 sets a lock time for freeze B (for example, 2000 msec) and a game lock time (30000 msec). (S231). Note that these timer subtraction processes for counting the lock execution time are performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze B lock time has elapsed (S232).

  In S232, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock time for freeze B has not elapsed (if S232 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S232. On the other hand, in S232, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock time for freeze B has elapsed (S232 is YES) or S230 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a reel acceleration start process (S233). ). By this process, the pseudo bonus start round effect is started. In the pseudo bonus start torso effect according to the present embodiment, at the timing immediately before the reel acceleration process in S233, the sub-control circuit 42 controls the pseudo bonus winning (start) notification effect (notification lamp lighting effect). Is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start command generation and storage process (S234). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  When the reel effect is an effect not accompanied by the short lock, a rotation start sound is generated at a timing when the sub-control circuit 42 receives the reel rotation start command generated in S234. Then, after the process of S234, the main CPU 51 ends the reel lock process, and moves the process to S205 of the reel effect execution process (see FIG. 95).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel lock processing is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for generating a lock (lock execution means, lock effect execution means).

[Reel automatic stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the reel automatic stop processing performed in S209 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution processing (see FIG. 95) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop effect pattern of the reel in the set pseudo bonus start rotation effect is the all-rotation simultaneous stop pattern (S241).

  In S241, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is not the all-body simultaneous stop pattern (if S241 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S245 described later. On the other hand, in S241, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern is the all-body simultaneous stop pattern (if S241 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the all-body simultaneous stop time. (S242). The subtraction process of the timer for counting the wait time for simultaneously stopping all the cylinders is performed by a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time for simultaneous stopping of the entire body has elapsed (S243). In S243, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time for all-body simultaneous stop has not elapsed (if S243 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S243.

  On the other hand, in S243, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time for all-body simultaneous stop has elapsed (if S243 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generation and storage process ( S244). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  The effect instruction command data generated in this process includes an effect instruction parameter indicating that the reel has been pseudo-stopped in the automatic reel stop effect. Specifically, in the effect instruction command having the data configuration shown in FIG. 80, 06H (pseudo stop) is set as the effect instruction parameter.

  When the effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generated in this process is transmitted, the main CPU 51 sets the stop button operation flag corresponding to the reel to which the pseudo stop has been made to the ON state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores “1” in a bit in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the target reel. In the process of S244, all the stop button operation flags are set to the ON state.

  Then, after the process of S244, the main CPU 51 ends the reel automatic stop process, and shifts the process to S210 of the reel effect execution process (see FIG. 95).

  Here, returning to the process of S241 again, if the determination in S241 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a reel acceleration start process (S245). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation control process for one round from the elapse of the notification wait time (2000 msec) to the start of automatic reel stop.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the data of the reel stop effect pattern (any one of the pattern Nos. 0 to 27) in the pseudo bonus start spinning effect determined by the reel effect lottery (S246). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel preparation eye check process generated in the reel stop preparation operation 1 (S247). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not the symbol position of each rotating reel is a position corresponding to the stop effect pattern of the reel.

  For example, when the stop effect pattern of the reel is the normal stop pattern of “BIG alignment”, the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol “red 7” of the left reel 3L, the symbol “red 7” of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol “red 7” of the right reel 3R. It is checked whether or not the symbol "red 7" is in a state of being lined up horizontally (reel preparation eye) while the reel is rotating. At this point, if the symbol position of each rotating reel is not a position corresponding to the stop effect pattern of the reel, the main CPU 51 determines in this processing that the symbol position of each rotating reel is a reel stop. The rotation state of the reel is adjusted so as to be at a position corresponding to the effect pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (pseudo press) generation and storage process (S248). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  The effect instruction command data generated in this process includes a parameter indicating the type of the reel that has been pseudo-pressed in the automatic reel stop effect. More specifically, in the effect instruction command having the data configuration shown in FIG. 80, 05H (pseudo press) is set as the effect instruction parameter, and the type of reel (pressed body) corresponding to the stop button that has been pseudo pressed is described below. Each data of the symbol position (pressed position) that has been pseudo-pressed and the symbol position that is to be pseudo-stopped (scheduled stop position) are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the target reel of the pseudo press has automatically stopped (S249). In S249, when the main CPU 51 determines that the target reel to be pseudo-pressed is not automatically stopped (if S249 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S249.

  On the other hand, in S249, when the main CPU 51 determines that the target reel of the pseudo press is automatically stopped (if S249 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generation and storage process (S250). . In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  The effect instruction command data generated in this process includes an effect instruction parameter indicating that the target reel has been pseudo-stopped in the automatic reel stop effect. Specifically, in the effect instruction command having the data configuration shown in FIG. 80, 06H (pseudo stop) is set as the effect instruction parameter.

  When the effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generated in this process is transmitted, the main CPU 51 sets the stop button operation flag corresponding to the target reel to which the pseudo stop has been performed, to the ON state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores “1” in a bit in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all reels have been pseudo (automatically) stopped (S251).

  In S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the reels are not pseudo (automatically) stopped (NO in S251), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S248, and changes the reel to be pseudo-pressed. Then, the processes in and after S248 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the reels have been pseudo (automatically) stopped (if S251 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel automatic stop process and executes the process in the reel effect execution. The process moves to S210 of the process (see FIG. 95).

  The above-described reel automatic stop processing is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also functions as a means for executing reel automatic stop processing (symbol automatic stop means).

[Processing when displaying pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the pseudo bonus display processing performed in S210 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution processing (see FIG. 95) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop effect pattern of the reels in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect is the stop pattern of the pseudo RB (S261).

  In S261, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is the stop pattern of the pseudo RB (if S261 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets a display waiting time for the pseudo RB (S262). . In the display waiting time period for the pseudo RB, various effects for notifying the start of the pseudo RB are performed under the control of the sub control circuit 42. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S266 described later.

  On the other hand, in S261, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern is not the pseudo RB stop pattern (NO in S261), the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo bonus start torso effect is present. Is a high-speed stop pattern (S263).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S263 that the reel stop effect pattern is the high-speed stop pattern (YES in S263), the main CPU 51 sets a display waiting time after the high-speed stop (S264). In the display waiting time period after the high speed stop, various effects for notifying the start of the pseudo BB at the time of the high speed stop are performed under the control of the sub control circuit 42. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S266 described later.

  On the other hand, in S263, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is not the high-speed stop pattern (NO in S263), the main CPU 51 sets the end waiting time of the effect by the sound effect at the time of the pseudo BB display. It is set (S265). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S266 described later.

  After the processing of S262, S264 or S265, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the waiting time set in these processings has elapsed (S266). The subtraction process of the timer for counting the waiting time is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  In S266, when the main CPU 51 determines that the waiting time has not elapsed (NO in S266), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S266. On the other hand, in S266, when the main CPU 51 determines that the waiting time has elapsed (if S266 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo bonus display processing and performs the reel effect execution processing (FIG. 95). It moves to S211 of (refer to).

[Pseudo bonus initialization processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the pseudo bonus initialization processing performed in S211 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution processing (see FIG. 95) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop effect pattern of the reels in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect is the stop pattern of the pseudo BB (S271). In S271, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is not the stop pattern of the pseudo BB (NO in S271), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S276 described later.

  On the other hand, in S271, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern is the pseudo BB stop pattern (if S271 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets an output request for the external signal 1 (S272). ). Next, the main CPU 51 outputs the external signal 1 to the external terminal board 18S (S273). By this processing, information on the start of the pseudo BB is transmitted to the hall computer / calling apparatus 100.

  After the processing of S273, the main CPU 51 sets a pseudo bonus winning lock time (4000 msec) for the pseudo BB (S274). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reservation process for a pseudo bonus END lock for the pseudo BB (S275). By this processing, the execution of the pseudo bonus END lock effect at the end of the started pseudo BB setting is reserved. Then, after the processing of S275, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S280 described later.

  Here, returning to the process of S271 again, if the determination of S271 is NO, the main CPU 51 sets an output request for the external signal 2 (S276). Next, the main CPU 51 outputs the external signal 2 to the external terminal board 18S (S277). By this processing, information on the start of the pseudo RB is transmitted to the hall computer / calling device 100.

  After the process of S277, the main CPU 51 sets a pseudo bonus winning lock time (700 msec) for the pseudo RB (S278). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reservation process of a pseudo bonus END lock for the pseudo RB (S279). By this processing, the execution of the pseudo bonus END lock effect at the end of the started pseudo RB setting is reserved. Then, after the processing of S279, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S280 described later.

  After the processing of S275 or S279, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the set pseudo bonus winning lock time has elapsed (S280). Note that the subtraction process of the timer for counting the pseudo bonus winning lock time is performed by a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  In S280, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus winning lock time has not elapsed (if S280 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S280. On the other hand, in S280, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus winning lock time has elapsed (if S280 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect stop process (S281). In this process, the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo bonus start torso effect, thereafter accelerates all reels to a predetermined rotation speed, and thereafter performs a process of maintaining the rotation speeds of all reels at a predetermined rotation speed. . That is, in this processing, the main CPU 51 performs the normal reel acceleration processing after the pseudo bonus start round effect is completed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (effect end) generation and storage process (S282). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  In the effect instruction command generated in this process, an effect instruction parameter indicating the end of the reel effect (pseudo bonus start torso effect) is set. Specifically, in the production instruction command having the data configuration shown in FIG. 80, 02H (production game stop 7, 8 end), 04H (production game stop 5, 6 end), 08H (production Any of the game stop 2 end), 0AH (end of the effect game stop 1), 0DH (end of the effect game stop 4), and 0FH (end of the effect game stop 3) are set according to the effect pattern executed. .

  Next, the main CPU 51 clears the stop button operation flag (S283). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the stop button operation flag of each reel, which has been set to a pseudo on state in the automatic reel stop effect, to an off state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze B flag is on (S284).

  In S284, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze B flag is not in the ON state (if S284 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo bonus initialization process, and proceeds to the reel effect execution process (FIG. 95). The process proceeds to S212 of FIG. On the other hand, in S284, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze B flag is on (in the case of YES determination in S284), the main CPU 51 determines whether the game lock time (30000 msec from the start of the lock of the freeze B) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (S285).

  In S285, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game lock time has not elapsed (when S285 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S285. On the other hand, in S285, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game lock time has elapsed (YES in S285), the main CPU 51 sets the freeze B flag to an off state (S286). Then, after the processing of S286, the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo bonus initialization processing, and moves the processing to S212 of the reel effect execution processing (see FIG. 95).

  The waiting time of S266 during the pseudo bonus display processing (FIG. 98) described above (display waiting time for pseudo RB, display waiting time after high-speed stop, or end waiting time of effect by sound effect at the time of pseudo BB display). The main control circuit 41 executes the digestion process of ()) and the digestion process of the pseudo bonus winning lock time in S280 during the pseudo bonus initialization process. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 executes the lock effect (notification) after the reel automatic stop processing in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect (after “BIG alignment” or “REG alignment” is stopped). Start lock effect execution means).

[Purchase priority storage processing]
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 100, of the pull-in priority order storage process performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  First, the main CPU 51 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 53 as the number of searches (S291). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a search target reel determination process (S292). In this processing, for example, the main CPU 51 selects a predetermined reel from among the spinning reels, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in the process of S292, when all (three) reels are rotating, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S301, which will be described later, are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S292 again, next, the middle reel 3C is determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S301, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S292, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an attraction priority table selection process (S293). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the position data of the search symbol and sets “20” as the symbol check count (S294). Then, the main CPU 51 performs a symbol code storing process (S295). In this processing, the symbol code corresponding to the current search symbol position data, which is located on the active line of the reel to be searched, is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of active lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 69) based on the symbol code acquired in S295 and the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73) (S296). At this point, a symbol combination that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won.

  In this embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination prepared in advance, or the stopped reel symbol. And a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23). When the former method is used, the correspondence between symbols and displayable combinations changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S297). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets a draw priority to a winning combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 69) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storing area. With reference to a ranking table (not shown), attraction-in priority data is acquired.

  The pull-in priority table is a table that defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-in priority table numbers. The pull-in priority table is used to search for a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which symbols are preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Normally, the priority is set in the order of replay, small combination, and bonus from the highest.

  In addition, if the symbol position is a symbol position that will result in an erroneous winning when stopped, "use prohibited (000H)" is acquired as the pull-in priority data in S297. Further, if the symbol position has not been won internally but does not result in an erroneous winning even when stopped, in S297, "stoppable (001H)" is acquired as the pull-in priority data.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in a pull-in priority data storage area (not shown) corresponding to the search target reel (S298). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area such that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area.

  In the pull-in priority data storage area, a storage area for priority data is provided for each reel type. In each pull-in priority data storage area, pull-in priority data determined according to each symbol position “0” to “19” of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, a search is made as to whether or not there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

  Further, the contents of the priority order attraction data stored in the attraction priority order data storage area differ depending on the type of the attraction priority order table number in the attraction priority order table referred to when determining the attraction priority order data. The attraction priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the reel surface. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

  Next, the main CPU 51 adds “1” to the position data of the search symbol and subtracts “1” from the symbol check count (S299). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol check count is “0” (S300).

  In S300, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is not “0” (if S300 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S295, and repeats the processes from S295. On the other hand, in S300, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is “0” (if S300 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S301).

  In S301, when the main CPU 51 determines that the search has not been performed for the number of search times (NO in S301), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S292, and repeats the processes from S292. On the other hand, in S301, when the main CPU 51 determines that the search has been performed the number of times (in the case of YES determination in S301), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority storage processing, and proceeds to S12 of the main flow (see FIG. 81). Transfer to

[Purchase priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a description will be given of the pull-in priority table selection processing performed in S293 in the flowchart of the pull-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 100).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S311).

  In S311, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority table selection data is set (if S311 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 51 sets the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 72) and the operation stop button storage area. With reference to FIG. 71, a pull-in priority table number corresponding to the pull-in priority table selection data is set from a pull-in priority table selection table (not shown) (S312). Then, after the processing of S312, the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection processing, and moves the processing to S294 of the attraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 100).

  The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority order selection number and the pressing order of the stop button and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information on the priority of the display combination defined in the above-described pull-in priority table (not shown).

  On the other hand, in S311, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority table selection data is not set (if S311 is NO), the main CPU 51 stores the attraction priority table corresponding to the attraction priority table number. It is set (S313). Then, after the processing of S313, the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection processing, and moves the processing to S294 of the attraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 100).

[Symbol code storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a description will be given of the symbol code storing process performed in S295 in the flowchart of the pull-in priority storing process (see FIG. 100).

  First, the main CPU 51 sets valid line data (S321). In the present embodiment, one line (cross-down line) is provided as an effective line as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the valid line data (S322). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, the user wants to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, so the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S323). Then, after storing the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, the main CPU 51 ends the symbol code storage processing, and shifts the processing to S296 of the attraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 100).

[Reel stop control processing]
Next, a reel stop control process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether a valid stop button has been pressed (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 51 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO in S331), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S331, and the operation of pressing the valid stop button is executed. Wait until.

  On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 51 determines that the valid stop button has been pressed (YES in S331), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 72) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 72). 71 is updated (S332). Next, the main CPU 51 decrements the value of the stop button non-operation counter by "1" (S333).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S334). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S335).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S336). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the number-of-slide-pieces determination data based on the type of the stop button at the time of the first stop, various stop tables, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a priority lock-in control process (S337). In this process, the comparison of the pull-in priority data corresponding to each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces “4” from the stop start position is performed, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority attraction control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command generation and storage process (S338). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of the stopped reel, the number of sliding frames, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines the expected stop position based on the stop start position and the number-of-slide-pieces determination data acquired in S336, and stores the determined expected stop position in the main RAM 53 (S339). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the expected stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the expected stop position determined in S339 as a search symbol position (S340). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 102 (S341). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73) using the acquired symbol code (S342).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a control change process (S343). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S344). In S344, when the main CPU 51 determines that the non-operation counter is not “0” (NO in S344), the main CPU 51 performs the pull-in priority storage processing described with reference to FIG. 100 (S345). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S331, and repeats the processing from S331.

  On the other hand, in S344, when the main CPU 51 determines that the non-operation counter is “0” (if S344 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control process, and proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 81). Move to S13).

  As described above, the reel stop control processing of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (variable display of symbols).

[Priority attraction control processing]
Next, the priority pull-in control process performed in S337 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 103) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets a pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S351). Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the data of the stop start position (S352).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets a priority order table corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data (S353).

  Note that the priority order table includes the number-of-sliding-pieces determination data obtained based on the stop table and a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding pieces (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is four). )) (Hereinafter referred to as “priority order”). That is, in the priority order table, the order of the number of sliding pieces to be applied with priority is determined for each piece of sliding piece number determination data. In this embodiment, each numerical value is searched (checked) sequentially from the lower priority order “5” of the priority order table, and the numerical value corresponding to the priority order “1” is preferentially applied as the number of sliding pieces. So that Then, in the process of S353, for example, when the number-of-slide-pieces determination data is "4", the data of the priority specified by the address in the priority order table corresponding to the number-of-slide-pieces determination data "4" Set.

  After the processing of S353, the main CPU 51 sets “5” to the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S354). By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) five times in the range of 0 to 4 frames. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the sliding piece number determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S355).

  Next, the main CPU 51 extracts a stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S356). Next, the main CPU 51 acquires pull-in priority data of the stop search position (S357).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the attraction priority data acquired in S357 is equal to or greater than the value of the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S358). In S358, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S357 is not equal to or higher than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (NO in S358), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S360 described later. .

  On the other hand, in S358, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S357 is equal to or larger than the previously-acquired pull-in priority data (if S358 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the number of sliding pieces. Update (S359).

  After the processing of S359 or in the case of NO in S358, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the priority order value and the number of checks (S360).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S361). In S361, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (NO in S361), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S356, and repeats the processes from S356.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S361 that the number of checks is “0” (if S361 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the finally updated number of sliding symbols (S362). Then, after the processing of S362, the main CPU 51 ends the priority pull-in control processing, and moves the processing to S338 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 103).

[Effect processing after the third stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the third post-stop effect processing performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70) and determines whether or not the RB is operating (S371).

  In S371, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is in operation (if S371 is YES), the main CPU 51 terminates the third stop effect processing, and proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 81). To S16. On the other hand, in S371, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is not operating (if S371 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the effect game state is the pseudo BB state or the pseudo RB state. (S372).

  In S372, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the pseudo BB state or the pseudo RB state (if S372 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the third stop effect processing, and proceeds to the main flow. Move to S16 in (see FIG. 81). On the other hand, in S372, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the pseudo BB state or the pseudo RB state (if S372 is YES), the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining pseudo bonus game number. (S373).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of remaining pseudo bonus games is “0” (S374).

  In S374, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of remaining pseudo bonus games is not “0” (NO in S374), the main CPU 51 ends the third stop effect processing, and proceeds to the main flow (FIG. The process moves to S16 in (see 81). On the other hand, in S374, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of remaining pseudo bonus games is “0” (if S374 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets a pseudo bonus END lock time (S375). At this time, if the pseudo bonus to be ended is the pseudo BB, the main CPU 51 sets 5200 msec as the pseudo bonus END lock time, and if the pseudo bonus to be ended is the pseudo RB, the main CPU 51 executes the pseudo bonus 2500 msec is set as the END lock time. The process of subtracting the timer for counting the pseudo bonus END lock time is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus END lock time has elapsed (S376). In S376, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus END lock time has not elapsed (if S376 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S376.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S376 that the pseudo bonus END lock time has elapsed (if S376 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the normal gaming state to the effect gaming state (S377). In this process, a process of setting the pseudo BB stock release flag to the off state is also performed. Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect reservation counter (the number of pseudo BB stocks) (S378).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect reservation counter (the number of pseudo BB stocks) is “0” (S379). In S379, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect reservation counter is “0” (if S379 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the third stop effect process, and proceeds to the main flow ( It moves to S16 in (see FIG. 81).

  On the other hand, in S379, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect reservation counter is not “0” (NO in S379), the main CPU 51 sets a pseudo BB stock release flag to an on state (S380). . Next, the main CPU 51 sets a state of waiting for notification to the effect game state (S381). Then, after the processing of S381, the main CPU 51 ends the third post-stop effect processing, and moves the processing to S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Medal payout process]
Next, the medal payout process performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a settlement operation has been performed by the player (S391). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs this determination process based on the on / off state of the settlement switch 14S. When the settlement switch 14S is on, the main CPU 51 determines that the settlement operation by the player has been performed. judge.

  In S391, when the main CPU 51 determines that the settlement operation has been performed by the player (if S391 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S401 described later. On the other hand, in S391, when the main CPU 51 determines that the settlement operation has not been performed by the player (NO in S391), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination is a small combination (S391). S392).

  In S392, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination is not a small combination (if S392 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a credit information command generation and storage process (S393). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a credit information command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The credit information command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The credit information command generated in this process includes information indicating that the number of medals to be paid is 0 (a value of a payout counter to be described later = 0), and information such as the current number of medals to be credited. It is.

  After the process of S393, the main CPU 51 performs a main demo shift timer setting process (S394). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets a predetermined transition time to the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode in the main demonstration transition timer. The predetermined transition time to the demo and / or the power saving mode set in the main demonstration transition timer can be arbitrarily set in advance. Further, the count process of the main demo transition timer (subtraction process of the timer for counting the demo transition time) is performed by a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later.

  Then, after the processing of S394, the main CPU 51 ends the medal payout processing, and moves the processing to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  On the other hand, in S392, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination is a small combination (if S392 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the payout number of medals corresponding to the type of the winning combination in the payout counter. (S395). The payout counter is a counter for counting the number of medals paid out in one game, and is provided in the main RAM 53. For example, when the winning combination is the combination name “C — 7 sheets A”, “7” is set to the payout counter in the processing of S395 (see FIG. 18).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout instruction process (S396). In this process, the main CPU 51 outputs a payout instruction signal to the hopper drive circuit 65. Thereby, one medal is paid out from the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a credit information command generation and storage process (S397). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a credit information command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The credit information command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The credit information command generated in this process includes information such as the current value of the payout counter (remaining payout number) and the current credit number of medals.

  Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the value of the payout counter (S398). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the payout counter is “0” (S399).

  In S399, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the payout counter is not “0” (NO in S399), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S396, and repeats the processes from S396.

  On the other hand, in S399, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the payout counter is “0” (if S399 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a main demo transition timer setting process (S400). In this process, a process similar to the process described in S394 is performed. Note that the count process of the main demo transition timer is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later. Then, after the processing in S400, the main CPU 51 ends the medal payout processing, and moves the processing to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  Here, returning to the process of S391 again, if the determination in S391 is YES (when the settlement operation is performed by the player), the main CPU 51 performs a settlement sound command generation and storage process (S401). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a settlement sound command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The settlement sound command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. Note that the settlement sound command generated in this process is data indicating the start of the settlement operation, and the sub-control circuit 42 performs a process of setting the state to the settlement-in-progress state upon receipt of the settlement sound command. Will be

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the number of credits of the current medal in the settlement counter (S402). The settlement counter is a counter for counting the number of medals paid out by the settlement operation, and is provided in the main RAM 53.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout instruction process (S403). By this processing, one medal is paid out from the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a credit information command generation and storage process (S404). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a credit information command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The credit information command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The credit information command generated in this process includes information such as the value of the settlement counter at the present time (current number of remaining credits).

  Next, the main CPU 51 decrements the value of the settlement counter by "1" (S405). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the settlement counter is “0” (S406).

  In S406, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the settlement counter is not “0” (NO in S406), the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S403, and repeats the processing from S403.

  On the other hand, in S406, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the settlement counter is “0” (if S406 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a main demo transition timer setting process (S407). In this process, a process similar to the process described in S394 is performed. Note that the count process of the main demo transition timer (subtraction process of the timer for counting the demo transition time) is performed by a timer update process during an interrupt process of FIG. 109 described later. Then, after the process of S407, the main CPU 51 ends the medal payout process, and moves the process to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check processing performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the BB is operating with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70) (S411). In S411, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is not operating (NO in S411), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move.

  On the other hand, in S411, when the main CPU 51 determines that BB is operating (if S411 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”. (S412).

  In S412, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (if S412 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end process (S413). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter, and sets a game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to the operating BB to an off state. If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals has exceeded 90 during the BB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end command generation and storage process (S414). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interruption process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S415). Then, after the processing of S415, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  Here, returning to the process of S412 again, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” in S412 (in the case of NO determination in S412), the main CPU 51 determines the number of possible winnings. The values of the counter and the number of possible games counter are updated (S416). The value of the possible prize counter is reduced by “1” when the small role (the role with the medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the possible game counter is “1” for one game regardless of the stop symbol. Is subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the possible winning number counter or the value of the available number of games counter is “0” (S417). In S417, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the number-of-winsable-number counter or the value of the number-of-playable-times counter is not “0” (if S417 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing. Then, the process proceeds to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  On the other hand, in S417, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the number-of-winsable-number counter or the value of the number-of-playable-times counter is “0” (if S417 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the RB has ended The processing is performed (S418). Specifically, processing such as setting a game state flag (RB game state flag) corresponding to RB to an off state, and clearing the values of a winning number counter and a game number counter is performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the bonus operation check process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not BB is operating (S421). In S421, when the main CPU 51 determines that BB is not operating (if S421 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S424 described later.

  On the other hand, in S421, when the main CPU 51 determines that BB is operating (if S421 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether RB is operating (S422). In S422, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is operating (if S422 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move.

  On the other hand, in S422, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is not operating (if S422 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the RB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 24). (S423). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70), and sets the respective values of the winning number counter and the game number counter to predetermined values ( "8") is set. Then, after the processing of S423, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  If the determination in S421 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the bonus (BB) is a winning (S424). In S424, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus is not a winning (when S424 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs processing of S428 described later.

  On the other hand, in S424, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus is a prize (if S424 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the BB operation process based on the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 24). S425). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 70), and sets a predetermined value (“90”) to the value of the bonus end number counter. Further, in this process, the main CPU 51 also performs the RB operation process of S423.

  Next, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S426). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus start command generation and storage process (S427). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interruption process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

  Then, after the processing of S427, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

  When the determination in S424 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination relating to the replay (replay) has been won (S428). In S428, when the main CPU 51 determines that the role related to the replay has not been won (if S428 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing and proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, in S428, when the main CPU 51 determines that the hand associated with the replay has won (if S428 is YES), the main CPU 51 requests automatic medal insertion (S429). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. Then, after the processing of S429, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Interrupt processing under control of main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, an interrupt process performed at a period of 1.1172 msec under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S431). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S432). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a timer update process (S433). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs, for example, a process of subtracting a value of a lock timer or the like for each interrupt process.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S434). In this process, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the main CPU 51 starts rotation of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R, and then rotates each reel at a constant speed. Drive control of three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 51 waits until the updated symbol counter matches the value corresponding to the expected stop position (the symbol at the expected stop position reaches an area on the active line of the display window section 4), and the main symbol is applied. The corresponding stepping motor is drive-controlled so that the rotation of the reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S434, in addition to the normal acceleration processing, the constant speed processing, and the stop processing of the reels described above, when the pseudo bonus start body effect is set at the start of the pseudo bonus, Control processing of the rotation operation and the stop operation of the reels in the pseudo bonus start round effect is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a command data transmission process (S435). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits various command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp / 7-segment driving process (S436). In this process, the main CPU 51 controls the drive of the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register return process (S437). Then, after that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt processing.

  As described above, the command data transmission process (S435) during the interrupt process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a unit (data transmitting unit, main control unit) for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. Various tables required for various processes of the sub CPU 81 described below are stored in the sub ROM 82, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 83.

[Main board communication task]
First, a main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 checks the reception of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 (S501). Next, when receiving the command, the sub CPU 81 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous command has been received (S503). In S503, when the sub CPU 81 determines that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO in S503), the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing from S501.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S503 that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES in S503), the sub CPU 81 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). ). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing in S504, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S501, and repeats the processing from S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 extracts a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S512 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S515 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a message in the message queue in S512 (if S512 is YES), the sub CPU 81 copies the game information from the message (S513). In this processing, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel stopped rotating, a display combination, and a game state flag specified by parameters are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. You.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect content determination process (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines the effect contents, registers effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the lamp data (S517). Note that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S514. After S517, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S511, and repeats the processing from S511.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect registration task is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also functions as a means (effect control means, sub-control unit) for controlling the execution of the effect corresponding to the received command data. In the present embodiment, the effect content determination process (S514) in the effect registration task is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for determining the content of the effect corresponding to the received command data (effect content determining means).

[Direction content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, the effect content determination processing performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111) will be described. The effect data determined (registered) in the following process is data specifying animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered in each of the following processes, for example, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as display of a video is executed.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S521).

  In S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the medal insertion command has been received (when S521 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a medal insertion command receiving process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of determining whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. The details of the medal insertion command receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of registering the effect data at the time of receiving the medal insertion command (S523). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect at the time of medal insertion (at the time of betting) based on information such as the presence / absence of medal insertion, the number of inserted medals, the value of the credit counter, and the processing result of S522 included in the medal insertion command. Register (determine) the data. Then, after the processing of S523, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the medal insertion command is received (if S521 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the time is the time when the start command is received (S524).

  In S524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the start command has been received (YES in S524), the sub CPU 81 performs a start command receiving process (S525). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of generating a sub effect flag, a process of determining whether or not a weight sound is output, and the like. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing when the start command is received (S526). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 includes, for example, the type of the game state flag, the type of the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of the pseudo bonus, the presence / absence of the reel lock effect, the value of the effect timer, the push order navigation included in the start command. Based on the information such as the processing result (type of effect flag, presence / absence of weight sound) of S525, the effect data at the start of the game (at the start) is registered (determined). Then, after the process of S526, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the start command has not been received (NO in S524), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S527).

  In S527, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel rotation start command has been received (if S527 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a reel rotation start command receiving process (S528). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers (determines) the effect data of the rotation start sound output, for example, upon receiving a reel rotation start command. Then, after the processing of S528, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S527, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the reel rotation start command is received (if S527 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is the time when the constant speed start command is received (S529). .

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S529 that it is at the time of receiving the constant speed start command (if S529 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process at the time of receiving the constant speed start command (S530). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of setting the lighting mode of the stop button to the effective lighting mode. The details of the process at the time of receiving the constant speed start command will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing at the time of receiving the constant speed start command (S531). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers (determines) the effect data corresponding to the effective lighting mode of the stop button set in the process of S530, for example. Then, after the processing of S531, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S529, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the reception of the constant speed start command (if S529 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is the reception of the reel stop command (S532).

  In S532, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel stop command has been received (YES in S532), the sub CPU 81 performs a reel stop command receiving process (S533). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of setting the lighting mode of the stop button to the invalid lighting mode. The details of the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of registering the effect data at the time of receiving the reel stop command (S534). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect at the time of reel stop based on information included in the reel stop command, for example, the type of the stop reel (operation stop button), the stop start position, the number of sliding frames, the processing result of S533, and the like. Register (determine) the data. Then, after the processing of S534, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S532, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time to receive the reel stop command (if S532 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is the time to receive the display command (S535).

  In S535, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the display command is being received (YES in S535), the sub CPU 81 performs a display command receiving process (S536). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 determines and registers the effect number by lottery based on the type of the display combination and the like. Here, the effect number is data for specifying the effect content to be executed this time. After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S535 that the display command has not been received (NO in S535), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a bonus start command has been received (S537).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S537 that it is at the time of receiving the bonus start command (if S537 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process at the time of receiving the bonus start command (S538). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers effect data for starting a bonus. After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S537, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the bonus start command has not been received (NO in S537), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S539).

  In S539, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the bonus end command has been received (if S539 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a bonus end command receiving process (S540). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data for ending the bonus. After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S539 that the bonus end command has not been received (NO in S539), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the payment sound command has been received (S541).

  In S541, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the settlement sound command has been received (when S541 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process when the settlement sound command is received (S542). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of setting a parameter indicating the status of the settlement. The details of the process at the time of receiving the settlement sound command will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. Then, after the processing of S542, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the payment sound command has not been received (NO in S541), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the credit information command has been received (S543).

  In S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the credit information command is being received (YES in S543), the sub CPU 81 performs a credit information command receiving process (S544). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs output processing of the payout sound, processing of counting the number of payouts, output processing of the adjustment sound, processing of counting the number of adjustments, and the like. Note that details of the credit information command receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing at the time of receiving the credit information command (S545). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of receiving the credit information command based on various parameters included in the credit information command, information on the processing result of S544 (output information of payout sound and settlement sound), and the like ( decide. Then, after the processing of S545, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the credit information command has not been received (NO in S543), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect instruction command has been received (S546).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S546 that it is at the time of receiving an effect instruction command (when S546 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an effect instruction command receiving process (S547). In this process, the sub CPU 81 responds to various triggers in the reel effect (pseudo bonus start torso effect, freeze effect, long weight effect, etc.) based on various information (effect instruction parameters and the like) included in the effect instruction command. Performs effect data set processing. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the effect instruction command will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing at the time of receiving the effect instruction command (S548). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of registering the effect data corresponding to the various triggers of the reel effect set in S547. Then, after the processing of S548, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S546, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the effect instruction command is received (NO in S546), the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is the time when the no operation command is received (S549).

  In S549, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the no-operation command has been received (if S549 is YES), the sub-CPU 81 performs the no-operation command receiving process (S550). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs, for example, a process of stopping the output of the settlement sound, a process of setting the stop button in an invalid lighting mode, a process of setting a demonstration effect, and the like. The details of the no-operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect data registration processing at the time of receiving the no-operation command (S551). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of registering the effect data set in S550. Then, after the processing of S551, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

[Medal input command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, a description will be given of the medal insertion command receiving process performed in S522 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number of startable games (three in the present embodiment) based on information on the number of inserted medals included in the medal insertion command (S561). In S561, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the medal insertion number is not the game startable number (NO in S561), the sub CPU 81 ends the medal insertion command receiving process, and proceeds to the effect content determination process ( It moves to S523 of FIG. 112 and FIG. 113).

  On the other hand, in S561, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of inserted medals is the game startable number (if S561 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demonstration flag to an off state (S562). The sub-demo flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game is currently in a non-game state (a state from the end of the payout process to the insertion of medals). It is determined that it is in the state. The sub-demo flag is set to an on state in a credit information command receiving process described later (see FIG. 119 described later). The sub demonstration flag is stored in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the demonstration and / or the power saving mode (S563). In this determination processing, when the demonstration effect data is currently set, the sub CPU 81 determines that the state is the demonstration and / or the power saving mode.

  In S563, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current state is not the demonstration and / or the power saving mode (when the determination in S563 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the medal insertion command receiving process and performs the process. The process moves to S523 of the determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  On the other hand, in S563, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current state is the demonstration and / or the power saving mode (if S563 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a demonstration effect ending process (S564). By this process, the effect contents are switched from the effect in the demonstration and / or the power saving mode to the effect in the normal state. Then, after the processing of S564, the sub CPU 81 ends the medal insertion command receiving processing, and moves the processing to S523 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a description will be given of the processing at the time of start command reception performed in S525 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a setting (generation) process of a sub effect flag (S571). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines the type of the internal winning combination (main small combination winning number) included in the start command, the presence / absence of the pseudo bonus (AT) and the type thereof, and the information on the number of pseudo BB stocks. With reference to the sub-effect flag list table shown in 78, a corresponding sub-effect flag is generated. Various effect contents are determined by lottery or the like based on the sub effect flag generated in this process.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not to perform a reel effect at the start of the current unit game (game) (S572). In this determination process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a pseudo bonus start game (notification game) based on, for example, information on the presence or absence and type of a pseudo bonus winning, the presence or absence of a reel lock effect included in the start command. It is determined that the game is a pseudo bonus start game, and the sub CPU 81 determines that a reel effect is to be performed.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S572 that the reel effect is not to be performed (NO in S572), the sub CPU 81 ends the start command receiving process, and proceeds to the effect content determination process (FIGS. 112 and 113). The process moves to S526 of FIG.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S572 that a reel effect is to be performed (YES in S572), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the wait sound generation condition is satisfied (S573). The sub CPU 81 performs this determination processing based on information included in the start command, which indicates whether or not the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has elapsed. If the wait time (4.1 sec) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the sub CPU 81 determines that the wait sound generation condition is satisfied.

  In S573, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the wait sound generation condition is not satisfied (in the case of NO determination in S573), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and performs the processing for effect contents determination processing (FIG. 112 (see FIG. 113 and FIG. 113).

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the wait sound generation condition is satisfied in S573 (if S573 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the wait sound (S574). Then, after the processing of S574, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and moves the processing to S526 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, the processing of setting the output of the wait sound (S574) when the wait sound generation condition is satisfied in S573 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command of the present embodiment is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for controlling the output of the weight sound (weight sound generation control means). .

[Process when receiving constant speed start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the processing at the time of receiving the constant speed start command performed in S530 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets the stop button valid sub flags of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R to the ON state (S591). Note that each stop button valid flag is a flag indicating whether or not the player's pressing operation on the corresponding stop button is valid, and when each stop button valid flag is in the on state, The pressing operation of the player on the corresponding stop button is valid. These stop button valid flags are stored in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data in which the lighting mode of all the stop buttons becomes the effective lighting mode (S592). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for lighting all the stop buttons in blue. Then, after the processing of S592, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the constant speed start command, and moves the processing to S531 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

[Reel stop command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, a description will be given of the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command performed in S533 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stopped reel is the left reel 3L (S601).

  In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is not the left reel 3L (if S601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S603 described later. On the other hand, in S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is the left reel 3L (if S601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the left stop button valid flag to an off state (S602).

  After the processing in S602 or when the determination in S601 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stopped reel is the middle reel 3C (S603).

  In S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is not the middle reel 3C (if S603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S605 described later. On the other hand, in S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is the middle reel 3C (if S603 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the middle stop button valid flag to an off state (S604).

  After the processing of S604 or when the determination of S603 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stopped reel is the right reel 3R (S605).

  In S605, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is not the right reel 3R (if S605 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S607 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S605 that the stopped reel is the right reel 3R (YES in S605), the sub CPU 81 sets the right stop button valid flag to an off state (S606).

  After the processing in S606 or when the determination in S605 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for setting the lighting mode of the stop button corresponding to the stopped reel to the invalid lighting mode (S607). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for turning on the stop button corresponding to the stopped reel in red. Then, after the processing of S607, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and moves the processing to S534 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, the control of the lighting mode of the stop button executed in the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command of the present embodiment and the processing at the time of receiving the constant speed start command described with reference to FIG. 116 is executed by the sub control circuit 42. You. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means (notification control means) for controlling the lighting mode (notification mode) of the stop button with the lighting lamp based on the received command data.

[Process when receiving payment sound command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the process at the time of receiving the settlement sound command performed in S542 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets the settlement flag to the ON state (S611). The settlement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current state is a state in which the medal is being settled. When the current state is the state in which the settlement is being made, the settlement flag is turned on. The settlement flag is stored in the sub RAM 83.

  Then, after the process of S611, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the settlement sound command, and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, the process at the time of receiving the settlement sound command of the present embodiment is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for setting the medal settlement state (payment state setting means) when the settlement sound command is received.

[Credit information command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the credit information command receiving process performed in S544 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the settlement flag is on (S621).

  In S621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the settlement flag is in the ON state (if S621 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S631 described later. On the other hand, in S621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the settlement flag is not in the ON state (when S621 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the payout number is “0” based on the information included in the credit information command. It is determined whether or not there is (S622). For example, when the winning combination is not a small combination, the information on the payout number included in the credit information command is “0”.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S622 that the payout number is “0” (YES in S622), the sub CPU 81 performs a sub demo shift timer setting process (S623). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 sets a predetermined transition time to the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode in the sub demonstration transition timer. The predetermined transition time to the demo and / or the power saving mode set in the sub-demo transition timer can be arbitrarily set in advance, but is set to the same time as the transition time set in the main demonstration transition timer. Is set. The counting process of the sub-demo transition timer (subtraction process of the timer for counting the demo transition time) is performed by an interrupt process periodically executed by a sub CPU 81 (not shown). Further, the sub-demo transition timer is a specific example of the second monitoring means according to the present invention.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demonstration flag to the ON state (S624). Then, after the processing of S624, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command, and moves the processing to S545 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  On the other hand, in S622, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the payout number is not “0” (if S622 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the payout number of medals (the remaining payout number) included in the credit information command. It is set to the payout end counter (S625). The payout end counter is a counter for counting the number of medals paid out in one game, and is provided in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the payout sound (S626). By this processing, a payout sound is generated each time one medal is paid out. Next, the sub CPU 81 subtracts “1” from the value of the payout end counter (S627).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the payout end counter is “0” (S628).

  In S628, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the payout end counter is not “0” (NO in S628), the sub CPU 81 ends the credit information command receiving process, and proceeds to the effect content determination process. The process moves to S545 of FIG. 112 (see FIG. 112 and FIG. 113).

  On the other hand, in S628, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the payout end counter is “0” (if S628 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the setting process of the sub demonstration shift timer (S629). In this process, the same process as the process described in S623 is performed. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demonstration flag to the ON state (S630). Then, after the processing of S630, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command, and moves the processing to S545 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  Here, returning to the processing of S621 again, if the determination of S621 is YES (if the payment is being made), the sub CPU 81 sets the number of credits of the medals (the number of remaining credits) included in the credit information command to the payment end counter. (S631). The settlement end counter is a counter for counting the number of settlement (payout) of credited medals, and is provided in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the settlement sound (S632). By this processing, a settlement sound is generated each time one medal is settled (paid out). Next, the sub CPU 81 subtracts “1” from the value of the settlement end counter (S633).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the settlement end counter is “0” (S634).

  In S634, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the settlement end counter is not “0” (NO in S634), the sub CPU 81 ends the credit information command receiving process, and proceeds to the effect content determination process. The process moves to S545 of FIG. 112 (see FIG. 112 and FIG. 113).

  On the other hand, in S634, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the settlement end counter is “0” (if S634 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the settlement flag to an off state (S635).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a setting process of the sub demonstration shift timer (S636). In this process, the same process as the process described in S623 is performed. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demonstration flag to the ON state (S637). Then, after the processing of S637, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command, and moves the processing to S545 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, the process of subtracting “1” from the value of the payout end counter (S 627) and the process of subtracting “1” from the value of the settlement end counter (S 633) during the process of receiving a credit information command according to the present embodiment are as follows. This is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a unit (payout number counting unit) for counting the number of times the credit information command is continuously received at the payout interval of one medal. Further, the sub-control circuit 42 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the payout end counter during the process of receiving a credit information command is “0” (S628). That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a unit (payout end determination unit) that determines whether or not the medal payout process has been completed based on the value of the payout end counter. The sub-control circuit 42 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the settlement end counter during the process of receiving a credit information command is “0” (S634). That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a unit (settlement end determination unit) for determining whether or not the medal adjustment process is completed based on the value of the adjustment end counter.

[Processing at the time of production instruction command reception]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a description will be given of the processing at the time of receiving the production instruction command performed in S547 in the flowchart of the production content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the production instruction command is the start of the reel production based on the information of the production instruction parameter included in the production instruction command (see FIG. 80) (S641).

  In S641, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the rendering instruction command is not the start of the reel rendering (when S641 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S643 described later. On the other hand, in S641, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the rendering instruction command is the start of the reel rendering (in the case of YES determination in S641), the sub CPU 81 sets the rendering data for reel rendering start. Is performed (S642). In this process, the sub CPU 81 changes the effect data for starting the reel effect depending on whether or not a short lock has occurred. The details of the processing for setting the effect data for reel effect start will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later.

  After the processing of S642 or when the determination of S641 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the end of the reel effect (S643).

  In S643, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the rendering instruction command is not the end of the reel rendering (if S643 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S645 described later. On the other hand, in S643, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the rendering instruction command is the end of the reel rendering (if S643 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the rendering data for the end of the reel rendering. Is performed (S644).

  After the processing of S644 or in the case of NO determination in S643, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the time when the stop button is pseudo-pressed (S645).

  In S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the pseudo press (when S645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the pseudo press (when S645 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the setting process of the effect data for the pseudo press. (S646). If the lighting mode of each stop button is controlled during the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start turning body effect) as in the normal case, in this processing, for example, the lighting mode of the target reel that is pseudo-pressed Is set to invalid lighting mode (lit red).

  After the processing of S646 or when S645 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the pseudo stop of the reel (S647).

  In S647, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the pseudo stop (when S647 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S649 described later. On the other hand, in S647, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the pseudo stop (when S647 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of setting the effect data for the pseudo stop. (S648).

  After the process of S648 or when the determination of S647 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start of the pseudo rotation of the reel (S649).

  In S649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the start of the pseudo rotation (if S649 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S651 described later. On the other hand, in S649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start of the pseudo rotation (when S649 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for start of the pseudo rotation. Is performed (S650).

  After the processing of S650 or when the determination of S649 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the time when the rotation of the reel is restarted (S651).

  In S651, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the rendering instruction command is not the rotation restart (if S651 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the rendering instruction command receiving process and executes the processing. The process moves to S548 of the determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  On the other hand, in S651, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the time when the rotation is restarted (if S651 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of setting the effect data for rotation restart. (S652). Then, after the processing of S652, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the production instruction command, and moves the processing to S548 of the production content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

[Set processing of production data for reel production start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a description will be given of the reel effect start effect data setting processing performed in S642 in the flow chart of the effect instruction command reception process (see FIG. 120).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel effect is a short lock occurrence effect based on the value of the effect instruction parameter included in the effect instruction command (S661).

  In S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel effect is a short lock occurrence effect (if S661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the effect data setting process for starting when the short lock occurs (S662). . In this process, the sub CPU 81 sets, for example, the output of the rotation start sound. After the process of S662, the sub CPU 81 ends the process of setting the effect data for reel effect start, and shifts the process to S643 of the effect instruction command receiving process (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, in S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel effect is not a short lock occurrence effect (NO in S661), the sub CPU 81 performs an effect data setting process for starting when no short lock occurs (S661). S663). After the process of S663, the sub CPU 81 ends the process of setting the effect data for reel effect start, and moves the process to S643 of the effect instruction command receiving process (see FIG. 120).

  As described above, the control of the processing for setting the effect data for starting the reel effect of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (effect control means) for controlling the execution of the rotation start sound output (specific effect).

[Process when receiving no operation command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a description will be given of the non-operation command reception process performed in S550 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is a settlement state, the number of credits is “0”, and a settlement sound is being output (S671). In this process, if the adjustment flag is on, the value of the adjustment end counter is “0”, and the output of the adjustment sound is set, the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition in S671 is It is determined that the condition is satisfied.

  In S671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S671 is not satisfied (if S671 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S673 described later. On the other hand, in S671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S671 is satisfied (when S671 is determined as YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the output stop of the adjustment sound (S672).

  After the process of S672 or when the determination of S671 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an operation input other than the stop operation based on the information included in the no-operation command (S673).

  In S673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no operation input other than the stop operation (when S673 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S683 described later. On the other hand, in S673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is an operation input other than the stop operation (if S673 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the left stop button valid flag is on. (S674).

  In S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the left stop button valid flag is not in the ON state (when S674 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S677 described later.

  On the other hand, in S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the left stop button valid flag is in the ON state (if S674 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the left stop button valid flag to the OFF state (S675). . Next, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for setting the lighting mode of the left stop button 17L to the invalid lighting mode (S676). By this processing, the lighting mode of the left stop button 17L changes from blue lighting to red lighting.

  After the process of S676 or when the determination of S674 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the middle stop button valid flag is on (S677).

  In S677, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the middle stop button valid flag is not in the ON state (if S677 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S680 described later.

  On the other hand, in S677, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the middle stop button valid flag is in the ON state (if S677 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the middle stop button valid flag to the OFF state (S678). . Next, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for setting the lighting mode of the middle stop button 17C to the invalid lighting mode (S679). By this processing, the lighting mode of the middle stop button 17C changes from blue lighting to red lighting.

  After the process of S679 or when the determination of S677 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the right stop button valid flag is on (S680).

  In S680, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the right stop button valid flag is not in the ON state (when S680 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S683 described later.

  On the other hand, in S680, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the right stop button valid flag is on (when S680 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the right stop button valid flag to off (S681). . Next, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data for setting the lighting mode of the right stop button 17R to the invalid lighting mode (S682). By this processing, the lighting mode of the right stop button 17R changes from blue lighting to red lighting.

  After the processing of S682, or when S673 or S680 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub demonstration flag is on (S683). In S683, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub demonstration flag is not in the ON state (in the case of NO determination in S683), the sub CPU 81 ends the no-operation command receiving process, and performs the rendering content determination process (FIG. 112 and FIG. The process proceeds to S551 of FIG. 113).

  On the other hand, in S683, when the sub-CPU 81 determines that the sub-demo flag is on (when the determination in S683 is YES), the sub-CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub-demo transition timer is “0” (S684). .

  In S684, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub-demo transition timer is not “0” (NO in S684), the sub CPU 81 ends the no-operation command receiving process, and proceeds to the rendering content determination process (FIG. 112 (see FIG. 113 and FIG. 113).

  On the other hand, in S684, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub demonstration shift timer is “0” (if S684 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets demonstration effect data (S685). By this processing, an effect for the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode (specific effect processing for the non-game state) is started. Then, after the process of S685, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving no operation command, and moves the process to S551 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

  As described above, in the process at the time of receiving the no-operation command of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current state is the settlement state, the number of credits is “0”, and the settlement sound is in the output state. The process of determining (S671) is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also functions as a unit (a settlement state determination unit) that determines whether the determination condition of S671 is satisfied. In the non-operation command receiving process, when it is determined that the determination condition of S671 is satisfied, the sub-control circuit 42 executes a process of setting the output stop of the adjustment sound (S672). That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the determination condition of S671 is satisfied, the sub-control circuit 42 stops the execution of the effect indicating the payment operation of the medal (game medium) (payment effect stop). Means).

  Further, as described above, the process (S684) of determining whether or not the sub-demo transition timer during the process of receiving the no-operation command according to the present embodiment is “0” is executed by the sub-control circuit. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 determines whether or not to perform a specific effect process for the demonstration and / or the power saving mode state (for the non-game state) based on the monitoring result by the sub demonstration transition timer. (The second non-game state determining means). In addition, the process of setting the demonstration effect data during the process of receiving the no-operation command (S685) is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also functions as a means for performing a specific effect processing for the state of the demonstration and / or the power saving mode (effect effect executing means during non-game).

<Various modifications>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and includes various embodiments and modifications without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. For example, the following various modifications can be considered.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the game period of the pseudo bonus (AT) is managed by the number of games has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The management may be performed based on the number of payouts, the number of difference, or the like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration example of the gaming machine having the AT function has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to, for example, gaming machines having a function in which the AT function and the RT function operate simultaneously, that is, a so-called ART function.

  In the present invention, a part or all of the various lottery processes and the various control processes performed by the sub control circuit 42 in the above embodiment may be performed by the main control circuit 41. Further, for example, a part or all of various lottery processes and various control processes performed by the main control circuit 41 in the above embodiment may be performed by the sub control circuit 42.

<Summary>
[Long weight production]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines having an AT function, there has been known a gaming machine that performs an AT lottery in accordance with a combination of symbols stopped and displayed (for example, see JP-A-2004-201705). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-201705, the AT can be performed so that the player can win a prize without missing a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination.

  As described above, conventionally, gaming machines that perform AT lottery in accordance with a combination of symbols stopped and displayed are known. However, since the combination of symbols stopped and displayed is determined by the internal winning combination, in the gaming machine having such a function, the result of the AT random determination is substantially determined by the random determination determining the internal winning combination. become. Therefore, the player can easily grasp whether or not the AT is performed from the determined internal winning combination, and there is a fear that the player does not enjoy the AT operation.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the first problem, and a first object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an AT function, in which a change in the operation of the AT is added, and An object of the present invention is to provide a technology capable of maintaining interest in AT operation.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, for a specific period, a notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which the notification by the notification means can be executed;
When starting the notification game state, after the end of the game period of the notification game state, again, notification game continuation determining means for determining whether to start the game of the notification game state,
Lock execution means for generating a lock for disabling a game operation by a player at a predetermined timing in a unit game for a predetermined period;
When it is determined by the notification game continuation determination means that the game in the notification game state is to be started again after the end of the game period in the notification game state, the lock execution means determines whether or not to generate the lock. Rock effect determination means,
A gaming machine equipped with.

  In the first gaming machine of the present invention, when the lock effect determination means determines that the lock is to be generated, after the predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game has been exhausted. The lock by the lock executing means may be generated.

Further, the first gaming machine of the present invention further includes a main control unit that controls operations related to the progress of the game and controls the operations.
The internal winning combination determination unit, the stop control unit, the notification game determination unit, the notification game continuation determination unit, the lock execution unit, and the lock effect determination unit are included in the main control unit,
The lock effect determination means determines whether or not the lock is to be generated by the lock execution means in the start unit game of the notification game state, and sets a unit within the game period of the notification game state to generate the lock. The game may be determined.

  According to the first gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the AT function, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player regarding the AT operation.

[Automatic production of reels with high-speed stop patterns (shifts)]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine having a function of performing an operation called “lock” for disabling or delaying a game for a predetermined period at a predetermined timing during a game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). Gazette). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920, a reel action is executed in which seven symbols are aligned and temporarily stopped during the lock period. It is possible to effectively inform the player that the privilege (AT) is given by the reel action having the seven symbols.

  As described above, conventionally, in a gaming machine having an AT function, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies that an AT has been given by a reel action (reel effect) with seven symbols. However, since the reel action with the seven symbols is a monotonous effect, this technique may cause the player to lose interest in the reel action.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above second problem, and a second object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a reel action function for a player's interest in a reel action (reel effect). It is an object of the present invention to provide a technology capable of improving the performance.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
Variation display means including a plurality of display columns provided with a plurality of symbols required for the game, based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, and circulating around the plurality of symbols and displaying a variation.
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, for a predetermined period, a notification game determination unit that can determine a transition to a notification game state in which the notification by the notification unit can be executed;
When the transition to the notification game state is determined by the notification game determination means, in the start unit game of the notification game state, during the lock period during which the game operation by the player is invalidated, the game in the notification game state is performed. Display line effect execution means for executing an effect of automatically stopping a combination of specific symbols indicating start on a predetermined virtual line extending over the plurality of display lines,
Before the automatic stop of the specific symbol combination, the display column effect execution means is arranged on a preparation line in a linear direction in which the specific symbol combination intersects with the predetermined virtual line, and A preparatory state in which adjacent symbols among a plurality of symbols constituting the combination are arranged shifted by one symbol is generated, and then the plurality of display columns are automatically stopped in a predetermined order, and the combination of the specific symbols is performed. Is stopped on the predetermined virtual line.

  Further, in the second gaming machine of the present invention, in the preparation state, the display row effect execution means may include a symbol other than a predetermined symbol among the plurality of symbols constituting the combination of the specific symbols. A state in which the display column stopped on a line and the predetermined symbol is included in the variable display is generated, and at a timing when the predetermined symbol included in the display column during the variable display reaches the preparation line. The display columns including the stopped symbols are again displayed in a variable manner, and then the plurality of display columns are automatically stopped in a predetermined order and the combination of the specific symbols is stopped on the predetermined virtual line. You may.

Further, in the second gaming machine of the present invention, the game machine further comprises a main control unit for controlling an operation related to the progress of the game and the operation,
The internal winning combination determination unit, the stop control unit, the notification game determination unit, and the display column effect execution unit are included in the main control unit,
A plurality of combinations of the specific symbols are provided,
The preparation state may be different depending on the type of the specific symbol combination.

  According to the second gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, in a gaming machine having a reel action function, it is possible to improve a player's interest in a reel action (reel effect).

[Pseudo bonus start round effect]
Conventionally, it is a combination (bonus combination) in which a special game is started by stopping display of a special combination of symbols, and a special combination in which a winning state is carried over until a special combination of symbols is displayed when the combination is internally won. A gaming machine provided with a so-called carryover combination is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920, a special combination is carried over until a special combination of symbols is displayed, so that a special combination of symbols cannot be displayed in a unit game won as a special combination. Even in this case, after the next unit game, an opportunity to display a special symbol combination again is given. In this case, there is no danger of losing the opportunity to start the special game, and even a player with poor skill can play the game with peace of mind.

  As described above, a gaming machine provided with a carryover combination is conventionally known. However, in such a gaming machine, if a special combination of symbols cannot be stopped and displayed over a period of a plurality of unit games (games), the player may feel discomfort. In addition, some players do not want others to know that a special symbol combination cannot be displayed.

  The present invention has been made to solve the third problem, and a third object of the present invention is to start a special game without giving a player any discomfort regardless of the skill. It is to provide a gaming machine capable of.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
Variation display means including a plurality of display columns provided with a plurality of symbols required for the game, based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, and circulating around the plurality of symbols and displaying a variation.
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, for a predetermined period, a notification game determination unit that can determine a transition to a notification game state in which the notification by the notification unit can be executed;
When the transition to the notification game state is determined by the notification game determination means, in the start unit game of the notification game state, after the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, the game operation by the player is invalid. During the lock period to be converted, a combination of specific symbols indicating the start of the game in the notification game state is automatically displayed on a predetermined virtual line extending over the plurality of display columns. ,
When the transition to the notification game state is determined by the notification game determination means, notification means for notifying that the transition to the notification game state is determined,
The display column effect execution means,
Elapsed time determination means for determining whether or not a specific time set in advance since the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means,
When the elapsed time determination unit determines that the specific time has elapsed, the combination of the specific symbols, a symbol automatic stop unit that starts an operation of automatically stopping on the predetermined virtual line, ,
The notification by the notification means is performed at a predetermined timing within the specific time.

  After detecting the start operation of the unit game in the notification game state (pseudo bonus state), a combination of specific symbols (“REG aligned”, “BIG aligned”) is placed on a predetermined virtual line through the reel rotation operation. The time until stopping usually depends on the position of the symbol stopped and displayed before the start unit game in the notification game state, and is therefore not constant. That is, the period during which the notification by the notification means can be executed (the time for the notification effect) depends on the position of the symbol stopped and displayed before the start unit game in the notification game state. However, in the third gaming machine, as described above, the period from the detection of the start operation to the start of the operation of automatically stopping a specific combination of symbols on a predetermined virtual line is defined as a specific time (notification wait time). ), And the notification by the notification means is performed within this specific time. Therefore, according to the third gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to secure a notification effect time that does not depend on the position of the symbol stopped and displayed before the start unit game in the notification game state.

  Further, in the third gaming machine of the present invention, after the elapsed time determination unit determines that the specific time has elapsed, further, after the variable display of the plurality of display columns is performed once, The symbol automatic stop means may start the automatic stop operation of the specific symbol combination.

Further, in the third gaming machine of the present invention, the game machine further includes a main control unit for controlling an operation related to the progress of the game and the operation,
The internal winning combination determination unit, the stop control unit, the notification game determination unit, and the display column effect execution unit are included in the main control unit,
The notification by the notification means may be performed after a predetermined wait time has elapsed from the start of the previous unit game in the start unit game of the notification game state.

  According to the third gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of starting a special game regardless of skill.

  Further, in order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, for a predetermined period, a notification game determination unit that can determine a transition to a notification game state in which the notification by the notification unit can be executed;
When the transition to the notification game state is determined by the notification game determination means, notification means for notifying that the transition to the notification game state is determined,
In the case where the transition to the notification game state is determined by the notification game determination means, in the start unit game of the notification game state, after the predetermined weight time from the previous unit game start is consumed, the player A notification by the notification means during a lock period during which the game operation by the user is invalidated and before the variable display of the plurality of display columns is started.

  In the fourth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, when a predetermined wait time (4.1 sec) has elapsed since the start of the previous unit game, the transition to the notification gaming state (pseudo bonus state) is determined. This is notified by the notification means, and thereafter, the display row change display (reel rotation) operation is started. Therefore, in the fourth gaming machine, even if the pattern of the variable display operation (such as reverse rotation) of the display column at the start of the notification gaming state is increased, the notification gaming state is finally set after the start of the variable display of the display column. It is difficult for the player to recognize that the combination of specific symbols (“REG matching”, “BIG matching”) indicating the transition to “” is automatically stopped by the effect (stopping during locking). Further, similarly to the normal game (when no lock occurs), the change display operation of the display column is started after a lapse of the wait time from the start of the previous unit game, so that the presence or absence of the lock is immediately determined. Can be prevented. For these reasons, according to the fourth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, the effect of notifying that the transition to the notification game state has been determined (lighting effect of the notification lamp) is made a more effective effect. be able to.

  Further, in the fourth gaming machine of the present invention, further, when the notification game determination means determines the transition to the notification game state, in the start unit game of the notification game state, during the lock period, After the notification by the notification means is performed, the variable display of the plurality of display columns is started, and thereafter, a combination of specific symbols indicating the start of the game in the notification game state is a predetermined combination across the plurality of display columns. A display sequence effect executing means for executing an effect of automatically stopping on the virtual line may be provided.

Further, the fourth gaming machine of the present invention further comprises a main control unit for controlling an operation related to the progress of the game and the operation,
The internal winning combination determination unit, the stop control unit, the notification game determination unit, and the display column effect execution unit are included in the main control unit,
The display column effect execution means,
After the specific symbol combination automatically stops on the predetermined virtual line, a notification start lock effect executing means for generating a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player for a specific period may be provided.

  Also in the fourth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of starting a special game regardless of skill.

[Weight sound generation function]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that generates a state called “lock” that invalidates or delays a game operation by a player at a predetermined timing during a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). . Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-254920 proposes a gaming machine having an effect function of performing a reel action by rotating and stopping a reel during locking. In such a gaming machine, an effect using the reels can be performed while the game machine is locked, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  As described above, conventionally, there have been known gaming machines having a function of performing a reel effect during locking. However, since the game operation during the lock is not a real game operation but a pseudo game operation, if the player recognizes that the game is locked, the player's interest in such an effect is reduced. There was fear.

  The present invention has been made to solve the fourth problem, and a fourth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that makes it difficult for a player to recognize that the player is locked. .

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, for a predetermined period, a notification game determination unit that can determine a transition to a notification game state in which the notification by the notification unit can be executed;
When the transition to the notification game state is determined by the notification game determination means, in the start unit game of the notification game state, during the lock period during which the game operation by the player is invalidated, the game in the notification game state is performed. Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect indicating start,
Audio output means for outputting a predetermined audio,
In a game in which the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, if the predetermined weight time has not elapsed since the start of the previous unit game, the predetermined weight time has elapsed by the audio output means. A gaming machine, wherein a weight sound indicating that there is no sound is output, and the weight sound is not output if the predetermined weight time has elapsed since the start of the previous unit game.

In the fifth gaming machine of the present invention, further,
Determining whether or not the predetermined weight time has elapsed, and if the predetermined weight time has not elapsed, weight executing means for not starting the variable display of the plurality of display columns;
When the weight executing means determines that the predetermined wait time has not elapsed, the apparatus may further include a weight sound generation control means for controlling output of the weight sound.

  Further, in the fifth gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification game determination means determines the transition to the notification game state, the notification game state starts unit game, the predetermined period during the lock period. The effect of automatically stopping a specific symbol combination indicating the start of the game in the notification game state on a predetermined virtual line extending over the plurality of display columns is executed by the effect execution means. You may make it transfer to the said notification game state.

  According to the fifth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the player is locked.

[Control function of lighting mode of stop button]
A gaming machine generally includes a main control unit that controls, for example, reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and a sub-control unit that controls, for example, the above-described AT. Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which the sub control unit performs an AT lottery based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the processing load on the control unit can be dispersed.

  As described above, conventionally, there have been known gaming machines in which the sub control unit performs the AT random determination based on the received command. However, since the AT is a function that affects the payout performance of the gaming machine, it is required to be controlled by the main control unit.

  In general, an inspection is performed on a gaming machine to determine whether or not it is appropriate to install the gaming machine in a game arcade. However, the capacity of the main control unit is limited by the efficiency of the inspection. , There were certain restrictions. Therefore, due to the limitation of the capacity of the main control unit, conventionally, various functions that are preferably controlled by the main control unit such as the AT described above are mounted on peripheral boards such as the sub control unit.

  The present invention has been made to solve the fifth problem, and a fifth object of the present invention is to reduce the amount of processing and the amount of data in the main control unit, and to reduce the amount of data to be controlled by the main control unit such as an AT. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enables various functions preferred by the main control unit.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
A notification device that notifies the player of the validity or invalidity of the stop operation,
Data transmission means for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game,
A notification control unit that receives data transmitted from the data transmission unit, and controls a notification mode by the notification device based on the received data,
When the notification control unit receives data indicating that the speed of the variable display of the display row has reached a predetermined speed, the notification control unit determines that the notification mode by the notification device is effective for a stop operation by a player. Is controlled to be the first notification mode indicating that
When the notification control unit receives data indicating that a stop operation has been performed by the player, the notification control unit indicates that the notification mode by the notification device indicates that the stop operation by the player is invalid. A gaming machine characterized by performing control so as to be in the second notification mode.

  Further, in the sixth gaming machine of the present invention, in a state where the stop operation by the player is valid, the notification control means may receive data corresponding to a predetermined operation other than the stop operation by the player. The notification control means may control the notification mode of the notification device to be the second notification mode.

In the sixth gaming machine of the present invention, further,
During a lock period during which a game operation by a player is invalidated, a display column effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect including a plurality of types of pseudo actions by the plurality of display lines,
During the execution of the predetermined effect, a pseudo notification control unit that receives data transmitted from the data transmission unit and controls a notification mode by the notification device based on the received data,
During the execution period of the predetermined effect, the data transmission unit transmits data indicating the execution of the pseudo operation for each of the pseudo operations,
When the pseudo notification control unit receives data indicating that the rotation speed of the variable display of the display column has reached a specific speed during the execution of the predetermined effect, the pseudo notification control unit is configured to execute the notification. Controlling the notification mode by the device to be the first notification mode;
When the pseudo notification control unit receives data indicating that a pseudo stop operation has been performed on the display column during the variable display during the execution of the predetermined effect, the pseudo notification control unit includes: Alternatively, control may be performed so that the notification mode by the notification device is the second notification mode.

  According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the processing amount and the data amount in the main control unit can be reduced, and various functions that are preferably controlled by the main control unit such as the AT are executed by the main control unit. Can be made possible.

[Generation mode of rotation start sound when short lock occurs]
A gaming machine generally includes a main control unit that controls, for example, reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs effect control processing. Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which the sub-control unit performs effect control based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). In the gaming machine having such a configuration, a predetermined effect can be executed in response to various triggers of the gaming operation controlled by the main control unit.

  As described above, conventionally, there have been known gaming machines capable of executing a predetermined effect in response to various triggers of a gaming operation. Furthermore, in recent years, gaming machines that perform an effect (rotation start sound) with the start of rotation of a reel have been known. In this technical field, there has been a demand for the development of a gaming machine capable of executing a new effect utilizing the effect.

  The present invention has been made in order to meet the sixth problem, and a sixth object of the present invention is to provide a game capable of performing a new effect utilizing an effect at the start of rotation accompanying the start of reel rotation. Is to provide a machine.

  In order to solve the sixth problem, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, for a predetermined period, a notification game determination unit that can determine a transition to a notification game state in which the notification by the notification unit can be executed;
At a predetermined timing in the unit game, a lock effect execution means capable of executing an effect of generating a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player for a predetermined period,
A fluctuation start effect performing means for performing a specific effect indicating the start of the fluctuation display at the start of the fluctuation display of the plurality of display columns,
Data transmission means for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game,
An effect control unit that receives data transmitted from the data transmission unit, and controls execution of the specific effect by the fluctuation start effect execution unit based on the received data,
In a game in which an effect for generating a specific lock by the lock effect execution means does not occur, after a predetermined wait time from the start of the previous unit game has been exhausted, the effect control means sets the change display of the display column. When receiving data indicating the start, the fluctuation start-time effect performing means executes the specific effect,
In a game in which an effect of generating the specific lock is performed by the lock effect execution unit after the predetermined wait time has been consumed from the start of the previous unit game, the effect control unit starts the specific lock. The game machine wherein the effect at the start of change executes the specific effect when data indicating the following is received.

In the seventh gaming machine of the present invention, the specific effect is an effect of generating a sound indicating the start of the variable display at the start of the variable display of the plurality of display columns,
The execution timing of the specific effect in the game in which the effect of generating the specific lock is performed may be the same as the execution timing of the specific effect in the game in which the effect of generating the specific lock does not occur. Good.

  According to the seventh gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to perform a new effect utilizing the effect at the start of rotation accompanying the start of reel rotation.

[Production and transmission function of production instruction command]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that generates a state called “lock” that invalidates or delays a game operation by a player at a predetermined timing during a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). . Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-254920 proposes a gaming machine having an effect function of performing a reel action by rotating and stopping a reel during locking. In such a gaming machine, an effect using the reels can be performed while the game machine is locked, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of performing a reel effect while locked is known. In general, a gaming machine includes, for example, a main control unit that controls a reel operation control process, an internal lottery process, and the like, and a sub control unit that mainly performs an effect control process. The reel effect is usually controlled by the main control unit. That is, the reel operation control in the reel effect is performed by the main control unit. For example, other effects using the liquid crystal display device and the like are performed by the sub control unit. However, in such a configuration, there is a problem that even if another effect is executed in correspondence with the reel operation in the reel effect, a gap occurs between the two effects.

  The present invention has been made to solve the seventh problem, and a seventh object of the present invention is to control a reel operation during a reel effect controlled by a main control unit and a reel operation controlled by a sub control unit. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of further suppressing a deviation from a production effect.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
During a lock period during which a game operation by a player is invalidated, a display column effect execution unit capable of executing an effect including a plurality of types of pseudo actions by the plurality of display lines,
Data transmission means for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game,
An effect control means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmitting means and controlling execution of an effect corresponding to the received data,
During the execution period of the effect by the display line effect execution unit, the data transmission unit transmits data indicating the execution of the pseudo operation for each of the pseudo operations. .

  In order to solve the seventh problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
During a lock period during which a game operation by a player is invalidated, a display column effect execution unit capable of executing an effect including an operation of executing a pseudo stop operation on the display line during pseudo fluctuation display,
Data transmission means for transmitting data relating to the operation during the game,
An effect control means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmitting means and controlling execution of an effect corresponding to the received data,
During the execution of the effect by the display column effect execution means, when the pseudo stop operation is performed, the data transmission means transmits data indicating that the pseudo stop operation has been performed. A gaming machine characterized by:

In the eighth and ninth gaming machines of the present invention, further,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, for a predetermined period, the notification game determination means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which the notification by the notification means can be executed,
When the transition to the notification game state is determined by the notification game determination means, the display column effect execution means may execute the effect in the start unit game of the notification game state.

  According to the eighth and ninth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to further suppress a deviation between the reel operation during the reel effect controlled by the main control unit and the effect controlled by the sub-control unit. it can.

[Sub production flag generation function]
Conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a ramp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”) function has been developed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). reference).

  By providing the AT function as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920, it is possible to cause the player to expect an increase in the number of balls to be played out due to factors other than the bonus. It can spread and enhance the interest of the game.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, an effect is produced by an effect device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) in accordance with an internal winning combination. There has been a problem that processing has become complicated and an amount of data has increased.

  The present invention has been made to solve the eighth problem, and an eighth object of the present invention is to simplify the configuration of the effect determination (processing contents, data amount, etc.) including the success or failure of the AT. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can be realized by the configuration.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, for a predetermined period, notification game determination means for determining whether or not there is a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed;
Data indicating a result of the determination by the internal winning combination determining means, and data transmitting means for transmitting data indicating the result of the determination by the notification game determining means;
An effect content determining means for receiving the data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the effect content based on the received data,
The effect content determining means is configured to determine a type of the internal winning combination based on data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determining means received from the data transmitting means and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determining means. And generating an effect parameter by combining the information and the presence or absence of the transition to the notification game state, and determining the contents of the effect based on the effect parameter.

  Also, in the tenth gaming machine of the present invention, when the notification game determination means determines the transition to the notification game state, the game operation by the player is invalidated in the start unit game of the notification game state. During the lock period, an effect of automatically stopping a combination of specific symbols indicating the start of the game in the notification game state on a predetermined virtual line extending over the plurality of display columns is executed, and thereafter, the game state is changed to the game state. You may make it transfer to a notification game state.

  According to the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration for effect determination (processing content, data amount, and the like) including a pass / fail of an AT with a simple configuration.

  Further, in order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined period, a notification game determining means capable of stocking a privilege of shifting to the notification game state, determining whether or not to shift to the notification game state in which the notification by the notification means can be executed,
Data indicating a result of the determination by the internal winning combination determining means, and data transmitting means for transmitting data indicating the result of the determination by the notification game determining means;
An effect content determining means for receiving the data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the effect content based on the received data,
The effect content determining means is configured to determine a type of the internal winning combination based on data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determining means received from the data transmitting means and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determining means. And generating an effect parameter in combination with the presence or absence of the transition to the notification game state, based on the effect parameter, determine the content of the effect,
The effect content determining means determines whether or not the current unit game has shifted to the notification game state based on a difference between the stock number of the privilege in the current unit game and the stock number of the privilege in the previous unit game. A gaming machine characterized by making decisions.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information that gives a state advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a determination is made as to whether or not a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be performed is determined for a predetermined period, and a notification game determination in which a privilege of determining transition to the notification game state can be stocked. Means,
Data indicating a result of the determination by the internal winning combination determining means, and data transmitting means for transmitting data indicating the result of the determination by the notification game determining means;
An effect content determining means for receiving the data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the effect content based on the received data,
The effect content determining means is configured to determine a type of the internal winning combination based on data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determining means received from the data transmitting means and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determining means. And generating an effect parameter combining the presence or absence of the transition to the notification game state, based on the effect parameter, determine the content of the effect,
The effect content determination means determines the shift to the notification game state in the current unit game based on a difference between the number of stocks of the privilege in the current unit game and the number of stocks of the privilege in the previous unit game. A gaming machine characterized by determining the presence or absence.

  In the eleventh and twelfth gaming machines of the present invention, when the transition to the notification game state is determined, a lock in which a game operation by a player is invalidated in a start unit game of the notification game state. During the period, an effect of automatically stopping a combination of specific symbols indicating the start of the game in the notification game state on a predetermined virtual line extending over the plurality of display columns is executed, and thereafter, the game state is changed to the notification game state. It may be made to shift to.

  According to the eleventh and twelfth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration for effect determination (processing content, data amount, and the like) including a pass / fail of an AT with a simple configuration.

[Demo migration management function]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine having a function of generating a demonstration state when a non-gaming state (a state from completion of a payout process to detection of operation of a start lever) elapses for a predetermined time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-150921). Gazette). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a demonstration (such as a video for promoting a game) in a gaming machine assumed to be in a standby state, which can be useful for the operation of the gaming machine. In such a gaming machine, by monitoring the non-gaming state, it is possible to set the power saving mode without performing the demonstration or at the same time as the demonstration, in accordance with the effect state or the like or the setting of the gaming shop. .

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine that generates a demonstration state in a non-game state is known. In general, a gaming machine includes, for example, a main control unit that controls a reel operation control process, an internal lottery process, and the like, and a sub control unit that mainly performs an effect control process. In order to activate the power saving mode function, it is necessary to transmit a command (demo command) indicating that a certain time has elapsed in the non-game state from the main control unit to the sub control unit. In this case, problems such as an increase in command types and an increase in processing load in the main control unit occur.

  The present invention has been made to solve the ninth problem, and a ninth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of monitoring a non-game state without using a demo command. To provide.

  In order to solve the ninth problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A main control unit that controls a game operation and transmits data regarding an operation during the game;
A sub-control unit that receives the data transmitted from the main control unit and controls a staging operation based on the received data,
The main control unit includes:
First monitoring means for monitoring a non-game state;
A first non-gaming state determining unit that determines whether or not to perform a specific process for a non-gaming state based on a monitoring result by the first monitoring unit;
The sub-control unit includes:
Second monitoring means for monitoring a non-game state;
A second non-game state determining unit that determines whether to perform a specific effect process for a non-game state based on a monitoring result by the second monitoring unit;
When it is determined by the second non-game state determining means to perform the specific effect processing for the non-game state, non-game effect execution means for performing the specific effect processing for the non-game state, A gaming machine comprising:

  In the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention, the specific effect processing may be started at the same time as the specific processing.

  According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, a non-gaming state can be monitored without using a demo command.

[Medal payout count function]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine having a function of performing an effect (output of payout sound) indicating that payout is being performed during payout of medals (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223529). According to such a gaming machine, a privilege (medal payout) obtained as a result of the game can be effectively produced.

  As described above, conventionally, there have been known gaming machines that perform an effect indicating the fact during the payout of medals. Generally, a gaming machine includes, for example, a main control unit that controls a reel operation control process, an internal lottery process, and the like, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs an effect control process. In order to end the time effect, it is necessary to transmit a command (payout end command) indicating that the payout of medals has been completed from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. In this case, problems such as an increase in command types and an increase in processing load in the main control unit occur.

  The present invention has been made to solve the tenth problem, and a tenth object of the present invention is to provide an effect indicating that a medal is being paid out without using a payout end command. It is to provide a gaming machine capable of.

  In order to solve the tenth problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
When the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination related to the payout of the game medium is stopped on the determination line spanning the plurality of display columns by the internal winning combination means, the number of games to be paid corresponding to the predetermined combination Game medium payout means for paying out media,
Data transmission means for transmitting payout execution data indicating that one game medium has been paid out, each time one game medium is paid out by the game medium payout means;
Receiving the payout execution data transmitted from the data transmission means, and a payout number counting means for counting the number of times the payout execution data is received,
A gaming machine comprising: a payout completion determination unit configured to determine whether or not a payout number of game media corresponding to the predetermined combination has been paid out based on a counting result by the payout number counting unit.

In the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention, further,
A main control unit that controls a game operation and transmits data regarding an operation during the game;
A sub-control unit that receives data transmitted from the main control unit and controls a staging operation based on the received data,
When the payout completion determining means determines that the payout number of game media corresponding to the predetermined combination has not been paid out, a payout effect performing means for performing a performance indicating a payout operation of the game medium is provided. You may do so.

  Further, in the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention, the effect by the effect at payout execution means may be an effect for generating a sound indicating a payout operation of the game medium.

  According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the medal is being paid out without using the payout end command.

[Medal payment function]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine having a function of performing an effect (output of a settlement sound) indicating that settlement is being performed during the settlement of medals (see, for example, JP-A-2006-034438). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute an effective effect when paying out medals obtained as a result of the game.

  As described above, conventionally, there have been known gaming machines that perform an effect indicating that during the settlement of medals. Generally, a gaming machine includes, for example, a main control unit that controls a reel operation control process, an internal lottery process, and the like, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs an effect control process. In order to end the effect of (1), it is necessary to transmit a command (payout end command) indicating that the payout (payout) of medals has been completed from the main control unit to the sub control unit. In this case, problems such as an increase in command types and an increase in processing load in the main control unit occur.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described eleventh problem, and an eleventh object of the present invention is to provide an effect indicating that a medal is being settled without using a payout end command. It is to provide a gaming machine capable of.

  In order to solve the eleventh problem, the present invention provides a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means for detecting a loading operation of a game medium,
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Game medium storage means for storing surplus game media,
Settlement operation detecting means for detecting the presence or absence of a settlement operation of the game medium stored by the player,
Game medium payout means for paying out the stored game media one by one when the payment operation detecting means detects the payment operation;
When the payment operation of the game medium is detected by the payment operation detecting means, payment start data indicating the start of the payment of the game medium is transmitted, and one time each time one game medium is paid out by the game medium payout means, Data transmission means for transmitting payout execution data indicating that the gaming medium has been paid out,
When the settlement start data transmitted from the data transmission means is received, a settlement state setting means for setting a settlement state of the game medium,
Receiving the payout execution data transmitted from the data transmission means, and a payout number counting means for counting the number of times the payout execution data is received,
Settlement end determining means for determining whether all of the stored game media have been paid out, based on the counting result by the payout number counting means,
When the settlement state of the game medium is set and the settlement end determination means determines that all of the stored game media have not been paid out, it indicates a settlement operation of the game medium. A gaming machine comprising: an effect at the time of payment for performing an effect.

Further, in the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention, further,
A main control unit that controls a game operation and transmits data regarding an operation during the game;
A sub-control unit that receives the data transmitted from the main control unit and controls a production operation based on the received data, and the production by the production execution unit performs the payment operation of the game medium. The effect may be such that the sound shown is generated.

Further, in the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention, further,
The settlement state of the game medium is set, the effect indicating the settlement operation of the game medium is being executed, and all the stored game media are paid out. Settlement state determination means for determining whether or not the condition that
When the settlement state determination unit determines that the condition is satisfied, the game device may further include a settlement effect stop unit that stops execution of an effect indicating a settlement operation of the game medium.

  According to the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the medal is being adjusted without using the payout end command.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... exterior body, 2a ... cabinet, 2b ... front door, 3L ... left reel, 3C ... middle reel, 3R ... right reel, 4 ... display window part, 10 ... front panel, 11 ... Display device, 17L: left stop button, 17C: middle stop button, 17R: right stop button, 18S: external terminal board, 21: lamp group, 20L, 20R: speaker, 31: main control board, 32: sub control board, 41 main control circuit, 42 sub control circuit, 51 main CPU, 52 main ROM, 53 main RAM, 81 sub CPU

Claims (3)

A BET operation detecting means for detecting the BET operation of game media,
A start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on the detection of BET operation by the BET operation detecting means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined period, a notification game determining means capable of stocking a privilege of shifting to the notification game state, determining whether or not to shift to the notification game state in which the notification by the notification means can be executed,
Data indicating a result of the determination by the internal winning combination determining means, and data transmitting means for transmitting data indicating the result of the determination by the notification game determining means;
An effect content determining means for receiving the data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the effect content based on the received data,
The effect content deciding unit is configured to determine a type of the internal winning combination based on data indicating a result of the determination by the internal winning combination determining unit received from the data transmitting unit and data indicating a result of the determination by the notification game determining unit. And generating an effect parameter in combination with the presence or absence of the transition to the notification game state, based on the effect parameter, determine the content of the effect by lottery ,
The effect content determining means determines whether or not the current unit game has shifted to the notification game state based on a difference between the stock number of the privilege in the current unit game and the stock number of the privilege in the previous unit game. A gaming machine characterized by making decisions. A BET operation detecting means for detecting the BET operation of game media,
A start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player based on the detection of BET operation by the BET operation detecting means,
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
A variable display unit configured by a plurality of display columns and variably displaying symbols required for the game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
Stopping operation detecting means for detecting a stopping operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Notifying means for notifying information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a determination is made as to whether or not a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be performed is determined for a predetermined period, and a notification game determination in which a privilege of determining transition to the notification game state can be stocked. Means,
Data indicating a result of the determination by the internal winning combination determining means, and data transmitting means for transmitting data indicating the result of the determination by the notification game determining means;
An effect content determining means for receiving the data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the effect content based on the received data,
The effect content deciding unit is configured to determine a type of the internal winning combination based on data indicating a result of the determination by the internal winning combination determining unit received from the data transmitting unit and data indicating a result of the determination by the notification game determining unit. And generating an effect parameter combining the presence or absence of the transition to the notification game state, based on the effect parameter, determine the content of the effect by lottery ,
The effect content determination means determines the shift to the notification game state in the current unit game based on a difference between the number of stocks of the privilege in the current unit game and the number of stocks of the privilege in the previous unit game. A gaming machine characterized by determining the presence or absence. When there is no transition to the notification gaming state, when the special combination that can be carried over as the internal winning combination is determined, the effect parameter is when the combination relating to the addition of a game value is not determined as the internal winning combination. The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein the effect parameter is the same as the effect parameter .

Images